From: Thomas E. Dickey Date: Sun, 31 Jan 2016 02:15:39 +0000 (+0000) Subject: ncurses 6.0 - patch 20160130 X-Git-Tag: v6.1~101 X-Git-Url: https://ncurses.scripts.mit.edu/?p=ncurses.git;a=commitdiff_plain;h=6208c89f98f1cf9fe0980bd8e791846ce007a13d ncurses 6.0 - patch 20160130 + improve formatting of man/curs_refresh.3x and man/tset.1 manpages + regenerate HTML manpages using newer man2html to eliminate some unwanted blank lines. --- diff --git a/NEWS b/NEWS index 33dca735..3e8744e5 100644 --- a/NEWS +++ b/NEWS @@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ -- sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written -- -- authorization. -- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- --- $Id: NEWS,v 1.2564 2016/01/24 01:17:56 tom Exp $ +-- $Id: NEWS,v 1.2566 2016/01/30 19:38:41 tom Exp $ ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- This is a log of changes that ncurses has gone through since Zeyd started @@ -45,6 +45,11 @@ See the AUTHORS file for the corresponding full names. Changes through 1.9.9e did not credit all contributions; it is not possible to add this information. +20160130 + + improve formatting of man/curs_refresh.3x and man/tset.1 manpages + + regenerate HTML manpages using newer man2html to eliminate some + unwanted blank lines. + 20160123 + ifdef'd header-file definition of mouse_trafo() with NCURSES_NOMACROS (report by Corey Minyard). diff --git a/VERSION b/VERSION index 455ad1bc..c77f4a4c 100644 --- a/VERSION +++ b/VERSION @@ -1 +1 @@ -5:0:9 6.0 20160123 +5:0:9 6.0 20160130 diff --git a/dist.mk b/dist.mk index 6024c809..443dbb5f 100644 --- a/dist.mk +++ b/dist.mk @@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ # use or other dealings in this Software without prior written # # authorization. # ############################################################################## -# $Id: dist.mk,v 1.1090 2016/01/23 17:00:00 tom Exp $ +# $Id: dist.mk,v 1.1091 2016/01/30 15:30:48 tom Exp $ # Makefile for creating ncurses distributions. # # This only needs to be used directly as a makefile by developers, but @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ SHELL = /bin/sh # These define the major/minor/patch versions of ncurses. NCURSES_MAJOR = 6 NCURSES_MINOR = 0 -NCURSES_PATCH = 20160123 +NCURSES_PATCH = 20160130 # We don't append the patch to the version, since this only applies to releases VERSION = $(NCURSES_MAJOR).$(NCURSES_MINOR) diff --git a/doc/html/man/captoinfo.1m.html b/doc/html/man/captoinfo.1m.html index 0d034346..939c85e6 100644 --- a/doc/html/man/captoinfo.1m.html +++ b/doc/html/man/captoinfo.1m.html @@ -46,19 +46,16 @@ - -

NAME

+

NAME

        captoinfo  - convert a termcap description into a terminfo
        description
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        captoinfo [-vn width]  [-V] [-1] [-w width] file . . .
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        captoinfo looks  in  each  given  text  file  for  termcap
        descriptions.   For each one found, an equivalent terminfo
        description is written to  standard  output.   Termcap  tc
@@ -85,14 +82,12 @@
        -w   change the output to width characters.
 
 
-
-

FILES

+

FILES

        /usr/share/terminfo Compiled  terminal  description  data-
                            base.
 
 
-
-

TRANSLATIONS FROM NONSTANDARD CAPABILITIES

+

TRANSLATIONS FROM NONSTANDARD CAPABILITIES

        Some obsolete nonstandard capabilities will  automatically
        be  translated  into  standard  (SVr4/XSI Curses) terminfo
        capabilities by captoinfo.  Whenever one  of  these  auto-
@@ -191,8 +186,7 @@
        message.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        This  utility is actually a link to tic(1m), running in -I
        mode.  You can use other tic options such as -f and  -x.
 
@@ -201,15 +195,13 @@
        repeat it n times.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        infocmp(1m), curses(3x), terminfo(5)
 
-       This describes ncurses version 6.0 (patch 20151205).
+       This describes ncurses version 6.0 (patch 20160130).
 
 
-
-

AUTHOR

+

AUTHOR

        Eric S. Raymond <esr@snark.thyrsus.com> and
        Thomas E. Dickey <dickey@invisible-island.net>
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/clear.1.html b/doc/html/man/clear.1.html
index 0817f95e..73658604 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/clear.1.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/clear.1.html
@@ -45,18 +45,15 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        clear - clear the terminal screen
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        clear
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        clear  clears  your  screen if this is possible, including
        its scrollback buffer (if the extended "E3" capability  is
        defined).  clear looks in the environment for the terminal
@@ -67,11 +64,10 @@
        present.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        tput(1), terminfo(5)
 
-       This describes ncurses version 6.0 (patch 20151205).
+       This describes ncurses version 6.0 (patch 20160130).
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_add_wch.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_add_wch.3x.html
index f227fd39..66360113 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_add_wch.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_add_wch.3x.html
@@ -45,15 +45,13 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        add_wch,   wadd_wch,  mvadd_wch,  mvwadd_wch,  echo_wchar,
        wecho_wchar - add a complex character and rendition  to  a
        curses window, then advance the cursor
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int add_wch( const cchar_t *wch );
@@ -65,11 +63,9 @@
        int wecho_wchar( WINDOW *win, const cchar_t *wch );
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

 
-
-

add_wch

+

add_wch

        The add_wch, wadd_wch, mvadd_wch, and mvwadd_wch functions
        put the complex character wch into the given window at its
        current position, which is then advanced.  These functions
@@ -93,8 +89,7 @@
            updated and the cursor moves as if addch were called.
 
 
-
-

echo_wchar

+

echo_wchar

        The echo_wchar function is functionally  equivalent  to  a
        call to add_wch followed by a call to refresh.  Similarly,
        the wecho_wchar is functionally equivalent to  a  call  to
@@ -105,8 +100,7 @@
        functions instead of their equivalents.
 
 
-
-

Line Graphics

+

Line Graphics

        Like  curs_addch(3x),  addch_wch  accepts symbols which make it
        simple to draw lines and  other  frequently  used  special
        characters.   These  symbols  correspond to the same VT100
@@ -177,8 +171,7 @@
        WACS_D_PLUS       0x256c    +         double large plus or crossover
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        All routines return the integer ERR upon failure and OK on
        success.
 
@@ -187,14 +180,12 @@
        outside the window, or if the window pointer is null.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Note that add_wch, mvadd_wch, mvwadd_wch,  and  echo_wchar
        may be macros.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        All  of  these  functions  are described in the XSI Curses
        standard, Issue 4.  The defaults specified for  line-draw-
        ing characters apply in the POSIX locale.
@@ -220,8 +211,7 @@
        definitions which are not in the SVr4 implementations.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_addch(3x), curs_attr(3x), curs_clear(3x),
        curs_outopts(3x), curs_refresh(3x), putwc(3)
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_add_wchstr.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_add_wchstr.3x.html
index 7ee0cf12..0e681db9 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_add_wchstr.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_add_wchstr.3x.html
@@ -45,16 +45,14 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        add_wchstr, add_wchnstr, wadd_wchstr, wadd_wchnstr,
        mvadd_wchstr, mvadd_wchnstr, mvwadd_wchstr, mvwadd_wchnstr
        - add an array of complex characters (and attributes) to a
        curses window
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int add_wchstr(const cchar_t *wchstr);
@@ -67,8 +65,7 @@
        int mvwadd_wchnstr(WINDOW *win, int y, int x, const cchar_t *wchstr, int n);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        These functions copy the (null-terminated) array  of  com-
        plex  characters  wchstr  into  the window image structure
        starting at the current cursor position.  The  four  func-
@@ -98,8 +95,7 @@
        background character and rendition.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        All functions return the integer ERR upon failure  and  OK
        on success.
 
@@ -111,19 +107,16 @@
        outside the window, or if the window pointer is null.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        All functions except wadd_wchnstr may be macros.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These entry points are described in the XSI  Curses  stan-
        dard, Issue 4.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curs_addwstr(3x), curses(3x).
 
        Comparable functions in the narrow-character (ncurses) li-
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_addch.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_addch.3x.html
index 4ffe0a7f..eaedb031 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_addch.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_addch.3x.html
@@ -46,15 +46,13 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        addch,  waddch,  mvaddch,  mvwaddch, echochar, wechochar -
        add a character (with attributes) to a curses window, then
        advance the cursor
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int addch(const chtype ch);
@@ -65,11 +63,9 @@
        int wechochar(WINDOW *win, const chtype ch);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

 
-
-

Adding characters

+

Adding characters

        The  addch,  waddch, mvaddch and mvwaddch routines put the
        character ch into the given window at its  current  window
        position,  which  is then advanced.  They are analogous to
@@ -119,8 +115,7 @@
        into characters.
 
 
-
-

Echoing characters

+

Echoing characters

        The  echochar  and  wechochar routines are equivalent to a
        call to addch followed by a call to refresh, or a call  to
        waddch followed by a call to wrefresh.  The knowledge that
@@ -130,8 +125,7 @@
        equivalents.
 
 
-
-

Line Graphics

+

Line Graphics

        The  following  variables  may be used to add line drawing
        characters to the screen with routines of the  addch  fam-
        ily.   The  default  character listed below is used if the
@@ -178,8 +172,7 @@
        ACS_VLINE      |         vertical line
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        All routines return the integer ERR upon failure and OK on
        success (the SVr4 manuals specify only "an  integer  value
        other than ERR") upon successful completion, unless other-
@@ -190,14 +183,12 @@
        outside the window, or if the window pointer is null.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Note that addch, mvaddch, mvwaddch, and  echochar  may  be
        macros.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        All  these functions are described in the XSI Curses stan-
        dard, Issue 4.  The defaults specified  for  forms-drawing
        characters apply in the POSIX locale.
@@ -237,8 +228,7 @@
        of other implementations, but is not documented.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x),  curs_attr(3x), curs_clear(3x), curs_inch(3x),
        curs_outopts(3x),  curs_refresh(3x),   curs_variables(3x),
        putc(3).
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_addchstr.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_addchstr.3x.html
index ce3cd02f..e19ee8a3 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_addchstr.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_addchstr.3x.html
@@ -45,15 +45,13 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        addchstr, addchnstr, waddchstr, waddchnstr, mvaddchstr,
        mvaddchnstr, mvwaddchstr, mvwaddchnstr - add a string of
        characters (and attributes) to a curses window
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int addchstr(const chtype *chstr);
@@ -66,8 +64,7 @@
        int mvwaddchnstr(WINDOW *win, int y, int x, const chtype *chstr, int n);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        These functions copy the (null-terminated) chstr array in-
        to the window image structure starting at the current cur-
        sor position.  The four functions with n as the last argu-
@@ -90,8 +87,7 @@
            gin, rather than wrapping it around to the new line.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        All functions return the integer ERR upon failure  and  OK
        on success.
 
@@ -103,19 +99,16 @@
        outside the window, or if the window pointer is null.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        All functions except waddchnstr may be macros.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These entry points are described in the XSI  Curses  stan-
        dard, Issue 4.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curs_addstr(3x), curses(3x).
 
        Comparable  functions in the wide-character (ncursesw) li-
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_addstr.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_addstr.3x.html
index 34b71508..13e75435 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_addstr.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_addstr.3x.html
@@ -45,15 +45,13 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        addstr, addnstr, waddstr, waddnstr, mvaddstr, mvaddnstr,
        mvwaddstr, mvwaddnstr - add a string of characters to a
        curses window and advance cursor
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int addstr(const char *str);
@@ -66,8 +64,7 @@
        int mvwaddnstr(WINDOW *win, int y, int x, const char *str, int n);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        These  functions  write  the  (null-terminated)  character
        string str on the given window.  It is similar to  calling
        waddch once for each character in the string.
@@ -81,8 +78,7 @@
        If n is -1, then the entire string will be added.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        All  functions  return the integer ERR upon failure and OK
        on success.
 
@@ -100,19 +96,16 @@
        outside the window, or if the window pointer is null.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        All of these functions except waddnstr may be macros.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  functions are described in the XSI Curses standard,
        Issue 4.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_addch(3x).
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_addwstr.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_addwstr.3x.html
index c24cfa2b..0d81cba1 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_addwstr.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_addwstr.3x.html
@@ -45,15 +45,13 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        addwstr, addnwstr, waddwstr, waddnwstr, mvaddwstr,
        mvaddnwstr, mvwaddwstr, mvwaddnwstr - add a string of wide
        characters to a curses window and advance cursor
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int addwstr(const wchar_t *wstr);
@@ -66,8 +64,7 @@
        int mvwaddnwstr(WINDOW *win, int y, int x, const wchar_t *wstr, int n);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        These  functions  write the characters of the (null-termi-
        nated) wchar_t character string wstr on the given  window.
        It  is  similar to constructing a cchar_t for each wchar_t
@@ -84,8 +81,7 @@
        added.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        All functions return the integer ERR upon failure  and  OK
        on success.
 
@@ -104,19 +100,16 @@
        outside the window, or if the window pointer is null.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        All of these functions except waddnwstr may be macros.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  functions are described in the XSI Curses standard,
        Issue 4.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_add_wch(3x)
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_attr.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_attr.3x.html
index 42e15c79..2cad0202 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_attr.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_attr.3x.html
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
   * sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written       *
   * authorization.                                                           *
   ****************************************************************************
-  * @Id: curs_attr.3x,v 1.43 2015/12/05 18:46:04 tom Exp @
+  * @Id: curs_attr.3x,v 1.44 2015/12/13 21:54:05 tom Exp @
 -->
 
 
@@ -46,8 +46,7 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        attroff, wattroff, attron, wattron, attrset, wattrset,
        color_set, wcolor_set, standend, wstandend, standout,
        wstandout, attr_get, wattr_get, attr_off, wattr_off,
@@ -56,8 +55,7 @@
        window attribute control routines
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
        int attroff(int attrs);
        int wattroff(WINDOW *win, int attrs);
@@ -93,8 +91,7 @@
        PAIR_NUMBER(attrs);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        These  routines  manipulate  the current attributes of the
        named window.  The current attributes of a window apply to
        all characters that are written into the window with wadd-
@@ -106,8 +103,7 @@
        on the screen.
 
 
-
-

attrset

+

attrset

        The  routine  attrset  sets  the current attributes of the
        given window to attrs.  The routine attroff turns off  the
        named  attributes  without turning any other attributes on
@@ -123,8 +119,7 @@
        used for erasing and clearing.
 
 
-
-

attr_set

+

attr_set

        The attrset routine is actually a legacy feature predating
        SVr4 curses but kept in X/Open Curses for the same  reason
        that  SVr4 curses kept it: compatibility.  The routine at-
@@ -135,16 +130,14 @@
        ments of type attr_t rather than int.
 
 
-
-

color_set

+

color_set

        The routine color_set sets the current color of the  given
        window  to the foreground/background combination described
        by the color_pair_number.  The parameter opts is  reserved
        for future use, applications must supply a null pointer.
 
 
-
-

attr_get

+

attr_get

        The  routine  wattr_get  returns the current attribute and
        color pair for the given window; attr_get returns the cur-
        rent attribute and color pair for stdscr.
@@ -154,8 +147,7 @@
        curs_legacy(3x)).
 
 
-
-

chgat

+

chgat

        The routine chgat changes the attributes of a given number
        of characters starting at the current cursor  location  of
        stdscr.   It  does not update the cursor and does not per-
@@ -170,8 +162,7 @@
        (leave it NULL).
 
 
-
-

Attributes

+

Attributes

        The following video attributes, defined in <curses.h>, can
        be passed to the routines attron, attroff, and attrset, or
        OR'd with the characters passed to  addch  (see  curs_add-
@@ -220,8 +211,7 @@
        claims (falsely) that these routines always return 1.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Note that attroff,  wattroff,  attron,  wattron,  attrset,
        wattrset, standend and standout may be macros.
 
@@ -233,8 +223,7 @@
        support more than 256 color pairs.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These functions are supported in the XSI Curses  standard,
        Issue  4.   The  standard  defined  the dedicated type for
        highlights, attr_t, which is not defined in  SVr4  curses.
@@ -289,8 +278,7 @@
        (i.e., via the sgr1 capability).
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        All routines return the integer OK on success, or  ERR  on
        failure.
 
@@ -307,8 +295,7 @@
        outside the window, or if the window pointer is null.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_addch(3x), curs_addstr(3x),
        curs_bkgd(3x), curs_printw(3x), curs_variables(3x)
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_beep.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_beep.3x.html
index b2ce7d28..abae4b25 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_beep.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_beep.3x.html
@@ -45,21 +45,18 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        beep, flash - curses bell and screen flash routines
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int beep(void);
        int flash(void);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The beep and flash routines are used to alert the terminal
        user.  The routine beep sounds an  audible  alarm  on  the
        terminal,  if  possible;  otherwise  it flashes the screen
@@ -70,27 +67,23 @@
        flash the screen.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        These routines return OK if they  succeed  in  beeping  or
        flashing, ERR otherwise.
 
 
-
-

EXTENSIONS

+

EXTENSIONS

        SVr4's  beep  and flash routines always returned OK, so it
        was not possible to tell when the beep or flash failed.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These functions are described in the XSI Curses  standard,
        Issue  4.  Like SVr4, it specifies that they always return
        OK.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x)
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_bkgd.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_bkgd.3x.html
index 05245326..81cdf90c 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_bkgd.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_bkgd.3x.html
@@ -45,14 +45,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        bkgdset,  wbkgdset,  bkgd,  wbkgd, getbkgd - curses window
        background manipulation routines
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        void bkgdset(chtype ch);
@@ -62,11 +60,9 @@
        chtype getbkgd(WINDOW *win);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

 
-
-

bkgdset

+

bkgdset

        The bkgdset and wbkgdset  routines  manipulate  the  back-
        ground  of  the  named window.  The window background is a
        chtype consisting of any combination of attributes  (i.e.,
@@ -84,8 +80,7 @@
        graphic rendition of the character put on the screen.
 
 
-
-

bkgd

+

bkgd

        The bkgd and wbkgd functions set the  background  property
        of  the  current  or  specified window and then apply this
        setting to every character position in that window:
@@ -97,33 +92,28 @@
            is changed to the new background character.
 
 
-
-

getbkgd

+

getbkgd

        The getbkgd function returns the  given  window's  current
        background character/attribute pair.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        The  routines  bkgd  and wbkgd return the integer OK.  The
        SVr4.0 manual says "or a non-negative integer  if  immedok
        is set", but this appears to be an error.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Note that bkgdset and bkgd may be macros.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  functions are described in the XSI Curses standard,
        Issue 4.  It specifies that bkgd and wbkgd return  ERR  on
        failure, but gives no failure conditions.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_addch(3x), curs_attr(3x), curs_out-
        opts(3x)
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_bkgrnd.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_bkgrnd.3x.html
index c2b10634..d5e9959a 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_bkgrnd.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_bkgrnd.3x.html
@@ -45,15 +45,13 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        bkgrnd,  wbkgrnd,  bkgrndset, wbkgrndset, getbkgrnd, wget-
        bkgrnd - curses  window  complex  background  manipulation
        routines
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int bkgrnd( const cchar_t *wch);
@@ -64,11 +62,9 @@
        int wgetbkgrnd(WINDOW *win, cchar_t *wch);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

 
-
-

bkgrndset

+

bkgrndset

        The bkgrndset and wbkgrndset routines manipulate the back-
        ground of the named window.  The window  background  is  a
        cchar_t consisting of any combination of attributes (i.e.,
@@ -86,8 +82,7 @@
        graphic rendition of the character put on the screen.
 
 
-
-

bkgrnd

+

bkgrnd

        The  bkgrnd and wbkgrnd functions set the background prop-
        erty of the current or specified  window  and  then  apply
        this setting to every character position in that window:
@@ -99,19 +94,16 @@
            is changed to the new background character.
 
 
-
-

getbkgrnd

+

getbkgrnd

        The  getbkgrnd function returns the given window's current
        background character/attribute pair via the wch pointer.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Note that bkgrnd, bkgrndset, and getbkgrnd may be macros.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        The bkgrndset and wbkgrndset  routines  do  not  return  a
        value.
 
@@ -120,8 +112,7 @@
        treated as an error.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_bkgd(3x)
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_border.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_border.3x.html
index f21be364..39dc9726 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_border.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_border.3x.html
@@ -45,15 +45,13 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        border, wborder, box, hline, whline, vline, wvline,
        mvhline, mvwhline, mvvline, mvwvline - create curses
        borders, horizontal and vertical lines
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
        int border(chtype ls, chtype rs, chtype ts, chtype bs,
           chtype tl, chtype tr, chtype bl, chtype br);
@@ -71,8 +69,7 @@
        int mvwvline(WINDOW *, int y, int x, chtype ch, int n);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The border, wborder and box routines draw a box around the
        edges of a window.  Other than the window,  each  argument
        is a character with attributes:
@@ -115,8 +112,7 @@
        many as fit into the window.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        All routines return the integer  OK.   The  SVr4.0  manual
        says  "or  a  non-negative integer if immedok is set", but
        this appears to be an error.
@@ -129,8 +125,7 @@
        outside the window, or if the window pointer is null.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The  borders  generated by these functions are inside bor-
        ders (this is also true of SVr4 curses, though the fact is
        not documented).
@@ -138,15 +133,13 @@
        Note that border and box may be macros.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  functions are described in the XSI Curses standard,
        Issue 4.  The standard specifies that they return  ERR  on
        failure, but specifies no error conditions.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_outopts(3x).
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_border_set.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_border_set.3x.html
index b7dfbc6e..6b4ba5e8 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_border_set.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_border_set.3x.html
@@ -45,16 +45,14 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        border_set, wborder_set, box_set, hline_set, whline_set,
        mvhline_set, mvwhline_set, vline_set, wvline_set,
        mvvline_set, mvwvline_set - create curses borders or lines
        using complex characters and renditions
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int border_set(
@@ -98,8 +96,7 @@
           const cchar_t *wch, int n);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The border_set and wborder_set  functions  draw  a  border
        around  the  edges  of  the  current  or specified window.
        These functions do not change the cursor position, and  do
@@ -147,14 +144,12 @@
        the window.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Note that border_set, hline_set, mvhline_set, mvvline_set,
        mvwhline_set, mvwvline_set, and vline_set may be macros.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        Upon successful completion,  these  functions  return  OK.
        Otherwise, they return ERR.
 
@@ -166,8 +161,7 @@
        outside the window, or if the window pointer is null.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        ncurses(3x), curs_add_wch(3x), curs_border(3x),  curs_out-
        opts(3x)
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_clear.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_clear.3x.html
index a805cfba..cfc60626 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_clear.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_clear.3x.html
@@ -45,14 +45,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        erase, werase, clear, wclear, clrtobot, wclrtobot,
        clrtoeol, wclrtoeol - clear all or part of a curses window
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        # include <curses.h>
 
        int erase(void);
@@ -65,8 +63,7 @@
        int wclrtoeol(WINDOW *win);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The erase and werase routines copy blanks to  every  posi-
        tion in the window, clearing the screen.
 
@@ -88,8 +85,7 @@
        dition (as set by wbkgdset) merged into them.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        All routines return the integer OK on success and  ERR  on
        failure.   The SVr4.0 manual says "or a non-negative inte-
        ger if immedok is set", but this appears to be an error.
@@ -99,14 +95,12 @@
        error if it is null.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Note that erase, werase, clear, wclear, clrtobot, and clr-
        toeol may be macros.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  functions are described in the XSI Curses standard,
        Issue 4.  The standard specifies that they return  ERR  on
        failure, but specifies no error conditions.
@@ -128,8 +122,7 @@
        ing the next wrefresh, use werase instead.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_outopts(3x), curs_refresh(3x), curs_vari-
        ables(3x)
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_color.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_color.3x.html
index 6f4aea05..9cf37917 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_color.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_color.3x.html
@@ -45,15 +45,13 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        start_color, init_pair, init_color, has_colors,
        can_change_color, color_content, pair_content, COLOR_PAIR
        - curses color manipulation routines
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        # include <curses.h>
 
        int start_color(void);
@@ -67,11 +65,9 @@
        int COLOR_PAIR(int n);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

 
-
-

Overview

+

Overview

        curses supports color attributes on  terminals  with  that
        capability.   To  use  these  routines start_color must be
        called, usually right after initscr.   Colors  are  always
@@ -95,8 +91,7 @@
        how a given color-pair is currently defined.
 
 
-
-

Color Rendering

+

Color Rendering

        The curses library combines these inputs  to  produce  the
        actual  foreground  and  background  colors  shown  on the
        screen:
@@ -141,8 +136,7 @@
        background character.
 
 
-
-

Routine Descriptions

+

Routine Descriptions

        The start_color routine requires no arguments.  It must be
        called if the programmer wants to use colors,  and  before
        any  other  color  manipulation  routine is called.  It is
@@ -275,8 +269,7 @@
        through COLORS, inclusive.
 
 
-
-

Colors

+

Colors

        In <curses.h> the following macros are defined.  These are
        the  standard colors (ISO-6429).  curses also assumes that
        COLOR_BLACK is the default background color for all termi-
@@ -292,8 +285,7 @@
              COLOR_WHITE
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        The  routines  can_change_color()  and has_colors() return
        TRUE or FALSE.
 
@@ -321,8 +313,7 @@
                located.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        In  the  ncurses implementation, there is a separate color
        activation flag, color palette, color pairs table, and as-
        sociated  COLORS  and  COLOR_PAIRS counts for each screen;
@@ -353,8 +344,7 @@
        o   Color RGB values are not settable.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        This implementation satisfies XSI Curses's  minimum  maxi-
        mums for COLORS and COLOR_PAIRS.
 
@@ -372,8 +362,7 @@
        will treat those as optional parameters when null.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x),  curs_initscr(3x),  curs_attr(3x),  curs_vari-
        ables(3x), default_colors(3x)
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_delch.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_delch.3x.html
index b0eb0b82..2ba296e6 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_delch.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_delch.3x.html
@@ -45,14 +45,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        delch,  wdelch, mvdelch, mvwdelch - delete character under
        the cursor in a curses window
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int delch(void);
@@ -61,8 +59,7 @@
        int mvwdelch(WINDOW *win, int y, int x);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        These routines delete the character under the cursor;  all
        characters to the right of the cursor on the same line are
        moved to the left one position and the last  character  on
@@ -72,8 +69,7 @@
        ture.)
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        All routines return the integer ERR upon failure and an OK
        (SVr4  specifies  only  "an integer value other than ERR")
        upon successful completion.
@@ -83,20 +79,17 @@
        outside the window, or if the window pointer is null.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Note that delch, mvdelch, and mvwdelch may be macros.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These functions are described in the XSI Curses  standard,
        Issue  4.   The standard specifies that they return ERR on
        failure, but specifies no error conditions.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x)
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_deleteln.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_deleteln.3x.html
index 567dfada..e45a6d13 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_deleteln.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_deleteln.3x.html
@@ -45,14 +45,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        deleteln,  wdeleteln,  insdelln, winsdelln, insertln, win-
        sertln - delete and insert lines in a curses window
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int deleteln(void);
@@ -63,8 +61,7 @@
        int winsertln(WINDOW *win);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The deleteln and wdeleteln routines delete the line  under
        the cursor in the window; all lines below the current line
        are moved up one line.  The bottom line of the  window  is
@@ -81,8 +78,7 @@
        above the current line and the bottom line is lost.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        All routines return the integer ERR upon failure and an OK
        (SVr4 specifies only "an integer value  other  than  ERR")
        upon successful completion.
@@ -92,15 +88,13 @@
        returned.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  functions are described in the XSI Curses standard,
        Issue 4.  The standard specifies that they return  ERR  on
        failure, but specifies no error conditions.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Note that all but winsdelln may be macros.
 
        These  routines  do  not require a hardware line delete or
@@ -109,8 +103,7 @@
        has been set on the current window.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x)
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_extend.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_extend.3x.html
index 26a0897b..224f5ade 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_extend.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_extend.3x.html
@@ -46,22 +46,19 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        curses_version,  use_extended_names - miscellaneous curses
        extensions
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        const char * curses_version(void);
        int use_extended_names(bool enable);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        These functions are extensions to the curses library which
        do not fit easily into other categories.
 
@@ -79,23 +76,20 @@
        implementations of curses.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These routines are specific to  ncurses.   They  were  not
        supported  on  Version 7, BSD or System V implementations.
        It is recommended that any code depending on them be  con-
        ditioned using NCURSES_VERSION.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curs_getch(3x),       curs_mouse(3x),      curs_print(3x),
        curs_util(3x),  default_colors(3x),  define_key(3x),  key-
        bound(3x), keyok(3x), resizeterm(3x), wresize(3x).
 
 
-
-

AUTHOR

+

AUTHOR

        Thomas Dickey.
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_get_wch.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_get_wch.3x.html
index 50332c15..d75b7249 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_get_wch.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_get_wch.3x.html
@@ -45,15 +45,13 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        get_wch,  wget_wch, mvget_wch, mvwget_wch, unget_wch - get
        (or push back) a wide character from curses terminal  key-
        board
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int get_wch(wint_t *wch);
@@ -63,8 +61,7 @@
        int unget_wch(const wchar_t wch);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The get_wch, wget_wch, mvget_wch, and mvwget_wch functions
        read a character from the  terminal  associated  with  the
        current  or  specified  window.   In  no-delay mode, if no
@@ -104,8 +101,7 @@
        operation may fail.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The  header  file  <curses.h>  automatically  includes the
        header file <stdio.h>.
 
@@ -121,8 +117,7 @@
        All functions except wget_wch and unget_wch may be macros.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        When  get_wch,  wget_wch,  mvget_wch, and mvwget_wch func-
        tions successfully report the pressing of a function  key,
        they return KEY_CODE_YES.  When they successfully report a
@@ -137,8 +132,7 @@
        outside the window, or if the window pointer is null.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x),       curs_getch(3x),        curs_ins_wch(3x),
        curs_inopts(3x), curs_move(3x), curs_refresh(3x)
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_get_wstr.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_get_wstr.3x.html
index 4d628a8e..dc4086ad 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_get_wstr.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_get_wstr.3x.html
@@ -45,15 +45,13 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        get_wstr, getn_wstr, wget_wstr, wgetn_wstr, mvget_wstr,
        mvgetn_wstr, mvwget_wstr, mvwgetn_wstr - get an array of
        wide characters from a curses terminal keyboard
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int get_wstr(wint_t *wstr);
@@ -66,8 +64,7 @@
        int mvwgetn_wstr(WINDOW *win, int y, int x, wint_t *wstr, int n);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The  effect  of get_wstr is as though a series of calls to
        get_wch were made, until a newline, other end-of-line,  or
        end-of-file condition is processed.  An end-of-file condi-
@@ -102,8 +99,7 @@
        the application prevent overflow of the input buffer.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Using get_wstr, mvget_wstr, mvwget_wstr, or  wget_wstr  to
        read  a  line  that overflows the array pointed to by wstr
        causes  undefined  results.    The   use   of   getn_wstr,
@@ -117,8 +113,7 @@
        All of these routines except wgetn_wstr may be macros.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        All of these functions return OK upon  successful  comple-
        tion.  Otherwise, they return ERR.
 
@@ -134,8 +129,7 @@
        outside the window, or if the window pointer is null.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  functions are described in The Single Unix Specifi-
        cation, Version 2.  No error conditions are defined.  This
        implementation  returns ERR if the window pointer is null,
@@ -149,8 +143,7 @@
        wint_t.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        Functions: curses(3x), curs_get_wch(3x), curs_getstr(3x).
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_getcchar.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_getcchar.3x.html
index 967c3475..224cbc66 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_getcchar.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_getcchar.3x.html
@@ -45,15 +45,13 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        getcchar,  setcchar - Get a wide character string and ren-
        dition from a cchar_t or set a cchar_t from a wide-charac-
        ter string
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int getcchar(
@@ -71,11 +69,9 @@
                void *opts );
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

 
-
-

getcchar

+

getcchar

        The  getcchar  function  gets  a wide-character string and
        rendition from a cchar_t argument.  When wch is not a null
        pointer, the getcchar function does the following:
@@ -101,8 +97,7 @@
            color_pair
 
 
-
-

setcchar

+

setcchar

        The  setcchar function initializes the location pointed to
        by wcval by using:
 
@@ -122,8 +117,7 @@
            allowed.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The  opts argument is reserved for future use.  Currently,
        an application must provide a null pointer as opts.
 
@@ -133,8 +127,7 @@
        effect is unspecified.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        When wch is a null pointer, getcchar returns the number of
        wide characters referenced by wcval, including one  for  a
        trailing null.
@@ -146,8 +139,7 @@
        wise, it returns ERR.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        Functions:   curs_attr(3x),   curs_color(3x),  curses(3x),
        wcwidth(3).
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_getch.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_getch.3x.html
index 1df5dd04..1a3b3764 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_getch.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_getch.3x.html
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
   * sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written       *
   * authorization.                                                           *
   ****************************************************************************
-  * @Id: curs_getch.3x,v 1.43 2015/09/19 22:25:05 tom Exp @
+  * @Id: curs_getch.3x,v 1.44 2015/12/20 01:43:03 tom Exp @
 -->
 
 
@@ -46,14 +46,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        getch, wgetch, mvgetch, mvwgetch, ungetch, has_key - get
        (or push back) characters from curses terminal keyboard
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int getch(void);
@@ -64,11 +62,9 @@
        int has_key(int ch);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

 
-
-

Reading characters

+

Reading characters

        The getch, wgetch, mvgetch and mvwgetch, routines  read  a
        character  from the window.  In no-delay mode, if no input
        is waiting, the value ERR is returned.  In delay mode, the
@@ -103,8 +99,7 @@
        called before another character is read.
 
 
-
-

Keypad mode

+

Keypad mode

        If  keypad is TRUE, and a function key is pressed, the to-
        ken for that function key is returned instead of  the  raw
        characters.   Possible function keys are defined in <curs-
@@ -123,19 +118,26 @@
        cape key and the escape is returned to the program.
 
 
-
-

Ungetting characters

+

Ungetting characters

        The ungetch routine places ch back onto the input queue to
        be returned by the next call to wgetch.  There is just one
        input queue for all windows.
 
 
-
-

Predefined key-codes

-       The following special keys, defined in <curses.h>, may  be
-       returned  by getch if keypad has been enabled.  Not all of
-       these are necessarily supported on any  particular  termi-
-       nal.
+

Predefined key-codes

+       The following special keys are defined in <curses.h>.
+
+       o   Except for the special case KEY_RESIZE, it  is  neces-
+           sary to enable keypad for getch to return these codes.
+
+       o   Not all of these are necessarily supported on any par-
+           ticular terminal.
+
+       o   The naming convention may seem obscure, with some  ap-
+           parent  misspellings  (such  as "RSUME" for "resume").
+           The names correspond to the long  terminfo  capability
+           names  for the keys, and were defined long ago, in the
+           1980s.
 
             Name            Key name
             -------------------------------------------------
@@ -177,6 +179,7 @@
             KEY_BTAB        Back tab key
             KEY_BEG         Beg(inning) key
             KEY_CANCEL      Cancel key
+
             KEY_CLOSE       Close key
             KEY_COMMAND     Cmd (command) key
             KEY_COPY        Copy key
@@ -186,7 +189,6 @@
             KEY_FIND        Find key
             KEY_HELP        Help key
             KEY_MARK        Mark key
-
             KEY_MESSAGE     Message key
             KEY_MOUSE       Mouse event read
             KEY_MOVE        Move key
@@ -243,41 +245,39 @@
                          +-----+------+-------+
                          | C1  | down |  C3   |
                          +-----+------+-------+
-       A few of these predefined values do not  correspond  to  a
+       A  few  of  these predefined values do not correspond to a
        real key:
 
-       o   KEY_RESIZE  is  returned  when the SIGWINCH signal has
-           been detected (see  curs_initscr(3x)  and  resizeterm(3x)).
-           This  code  is returned whether or not keypad has been
+       o   KEY_RESIZE is returned when the  SIGWINCH  signal  has
+           been  detected  (see  curs_initscr(3x) and resizeterm(3x)).
+           This code is returned whether or not keypad  has  been
            enabled.
 
-       o   KEY_MOUSE   is   returned   for   mouse-events    (see
+       o   KEY_MOUSE    is   returned   for   mouse-events   (see
            curs_mouse(3x)).  This code relies upon whether or not
            keypad(3x) has been enabled, because (e.g., with xterm
-           mouse  prototocol) ncurses must read escape sequences,
+           mouse prototocol) ncurses must read escape  sequences,
            just like a function key.
 
 
-
-

Testing key-codes

-       The has_key routine takes a key-code value from the  above
-       list,  and  returns TRUE or FALSE according to whether the
+

Testing key-codes

+       The  has_key routine takes a key-code value from the above
+       list, and returns TRUE or FALSE according to  whether  the
        current terminal type recognizes a key with that value.
 
        The library also supports these extensions:
 
           define_key
-               defines a key-code for a  given  string  (see  de-
+               defines  a  key-code  for  a given string (see de-
                fine_key(3x)).
 
           key_defined
-               checks  if there is a key-code defined for a given
+               checks if there is a key-code defined for a  given
                string (see key_defined(3x)).
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

-       All routines return the integer ERR upon  failure  and  an
+

RETURN VALUE

+       All  routines  return  the integer ERR upon failure and an
        integer value other than ERR (OK in the case of ungetch())
        upon successful completion.
 
@@ -285,112 +285,109 @@
                returns ERR if there is no more room in the FIFO.
 
           wgetch
-               returns ERR if the window pointer is null,  or  if
+               returns  ERR  if the window pointer is null, or if
                its timeout expires without having any data.
 
-       Functions  with a "mv" prefix first perform a cursor move-
-       ment using wmove, and return an error if the  position  is
+       Functions with a "mv" prefix first perform a cursor  move-
+       ment  using  wmove, and return an error if the position is
        outside the window, or if the window pointer is null.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Use of the escape key by a programmer for a single charac-
-       ter function is discouraged, as it will cause a  delay  of
+       ter  function  is discouraged, as it will cause a delay of
        up to one second while the keypad code looks for a follow-
        ing function-key sequence.
 
-       Some keys may be the same as commonly used  control  keys,
-       e.g.,  KEY_ENTER  versus  control/M,  KEY_BACKSPACE versus
+       Some  keys  may be the same as commonly used control keys,
+       e.g., KEY_ENTER  versus  control/M,  KEY_BACKSPACE  versus
        control/H.  Some curses implementations may differ accord-
-       ing  to  whether  they  treat these control keys specially
-       (and ignore the terminfo), or  use  the  terminfo  defini-
-       tions.   Ncurses uses the terminfo definition.  If it says
-       that KEY_ENTER is control/M, getch will  return  KEY_ENTER
+       ing to whether they treat  these  control  keys  specially
+       (and  ignore  the  terminfo),  or use the terminfo defini-
+       tions.  Ncurses uses the terminfo definition.  If it  says
+       that  KEY_ENTER  is control/M, getch will return KEY_ENTER
        when you press control/M.
 
-       Generally,  KEY_ENTER denotes the character(s) sent by the
+       Generally, KEY_ENTER denotes the character(s) sent by  the
        Enter key on the numeric keypad:
 
        o   the terminal description lists the most useful keys,
 
-       o   the Enter key on the regular keyboard is already  han-
+       o   the  Enter key on the regular keyboard is already han-
            dled by the standard ASCII characters for carriage-re-
            turn and line-feed,
 
-       o   depending on whether nl or nonl was  called,  pressing
-           "Enter"  on  the  regular keyboard may return either a
+       o   depending  on  whether nl or nonl was called, pressing
+           "Enter" on the regular keyboard may  return  either  a
            carriage-return or line-feed, and finally
 
-       o   "Enter or send" is the standard description  for  this
+       o   "Enter  or  send" is the standard description for this
            key.
 
-       When  using  getch, wgetch, mvgetch, or mvwgetch, nocbreak
+       When using getch, wgetch, mvgetch, or  mvwgetch,  nocbreak
        mode (nocbreak) and echo mode (echo) should not be used at
-       the  same  time.  Depending on the state of the tty driver
-       when each character is typed, the program may produce  un-
+       the same time.  Depending on the state of the  tty  driver
+       when  each character is typed, the program may produce un-
        desirable results.
 
        Note that getch, mvgetch, and mvwgetch may be macros.
 
        Historically, the set of keypad macros was largely defined
-       by the extremely function-key-rich keyboard  of  the  AT&T
-       7300,  aka  3B1,  aka Safari 4.  Modern personal computers
-       usually have only a small subset of these.   IBM  PC-style
-       consoles   typically  support  little  more  than  KEY_UP,
-       KEY_DOWN,   KEY_LEFT,   KEY_RIGHT,   KEY_HOME,    KEY_END,
+       by  the  extremely  function-key-rich keyboard of the AT&T
+       7300, aka 3B1, aka Safari 4.   Modern  personal  computers
+       usually  have  only a small subset of these.  IBM PC-style
+       consoles  typically  support  little  more  than   KEY_UP,
+       KEY_DOWN,    KEY_LEFT,   KEY_RIGHT,   KEY_HOME,   KEY_END,
        KEY_NPAGE, KEY_PPAGE, and function keys 1 through 12.  The
        Ins key is usually mapped to KEY_IC.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

-       The *get* functions are described in the XSI Curses  stan-
-       dard,  Issue  4.   They  read single-byte characters only.
-       The standard specifies that they return  ERR  on  failure,
+

PORTABILITY

+       The  *get* functions are described in the XSI Curses stan-
+       dard, Issue 4.  They  read  single-byte  characters  only.
+       The  standard  specifies  that they return ERR on failure,
        but specifies no error conditions.
 
-       The  echo  behavior of these functions on input of KEY_ or
-       backspace characters was not specified in the  SVr4  docu-
+       The echo behavior of these functions on input of  KEY_  or
+       backspace  characters  was not specified in the SVr4 docu-
        mentation.  This description is adopted from the XSI Curs-
        es standard.
 
-       The behavior of getch and friends in the presence of  han-
-       dled  signals  is  unspecified  in the SVr4 and XSI Curses
-       documentation.  Under historical  curses  implementations,
-       it  varied depending on whether the operating system's im-
-       plementation  of  handled  signal  receipt  interrupts   a
-       read(2)  call in progress or not, and also (in some imple-
-       mentations) depending on whether an input timeout or  non-
+       The  behavior of getch and friends in the presence of han-
+       dled signals is unspecified in the  SVr4  and  XSI  Curses
+       documentation.   Under  historical curses implementations,
+       it varied depending on whether the operating system's  im-
+       plementation   of  handled  signal  receipt  interrupts  a
+       read(2) call in progress or not, and also (in some  imple-
+       mentations)  depending on whether an input timeout or non-
        blocking mode has been set.
 
        KEY_MOUSE is mentioned in XSI Curses, along with a few re-
        lated terminfo capabilities, but no higher-level functions
-       use  the feature.  The implementation in ncurses is an ex-
+       use the feature.  The implementation in ncurses is an  ex-
        tension.
 
-       KEY_RESIZE is an extension first implemented for  ncurses.
+       KEY_RESIZE  is an extension first implemented for ncurses.
        NetBSD curses later added this extension.
 
        Programmers concerned about portability should be prepared
-       for either of two cases: (a) signal receipt does  not  in-
-       terrupt  getch;  (b)  signal  receipt interrupts getch and
-       causes it to return ERR with errno set  to  EINTR.   Under
-       the  ncurses  implementation, handled signals never inter-
+       for  either  of two cases: (a) signal receipt does not in-
+       terrupt getch; (b) signal  receipt  interrupts  getch  and
+       causes  it  to  return ERR with errno set to EINTR.  Under
+       the ncurses implementation, handled signals  never  inter-
        rupt getch.
 
-       The has_key function is unique to ncurses.   We  recommend
-       that  any  code  using it be conditionalized on the NCURS-
+       The  has_key  function is unique to ncurses.  We recommend
+       that any code using it be conditionalized  on  the  NCURS-
        ES_VERSION feature macro.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x),       curs_inopts(3x),       curs_outopts(3x),
        curs_mouse(3x),   curs_move(3x),   curs_refresh(3x),   re-
        sizeterm(3x).
 
-       Comparable functions in the wide-character (ncursesw)  li-
+       Comparable  functions in the wide-character (ncursesw) li-
        brary are described in curs_get_wch(3x).
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_getstr.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_getstr.3x.html
index 206b64e1..0141f63d 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_getstr.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_getstr.3x.html
@@ -45,15 +45,13 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        getstr, getnstr, wgetstr, wgetnstr, mvgetstr, mvgetnstr,
        mvwgetstr, mvwgetnstr - accept character strings from
        curses terminal keyboard
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int getstr(char *str);
@@ -66,8 +64,7 @@
        int mvwgetnstr(WINDOW *, int y, int x, char *str, int n);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The  function getstr is equivalent to a series of calls to
        getch, until a newline or carriage return is received (the
        terminating  character  is  not  included  in the returned
@@ -91,8 +88,7 @@
        vious character (typically a left motion).
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        All routines return the integer ERR upon failure and an OK
        (SVr4 specifies only "an integer value  other  than  ERR")
        upon successful completion.
@@ -112,13 +108,11 @@
        outside the window, or if the window pointer is null.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Note that getstr, mvgetstr, and mvwgetstr may be macros.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  functions are described in the XSI Curses standard,
        Issue 4.  They  read  single-byte  characters  only.   The
        standard  does  not define any error conditions.  This im-
@@ -138,8 +132,7 @@
        present but not documented in SVr4.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_getch(3x), curs_variables(3x).
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_getyx.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_getyx.3x.html
index 03d88a0c..cb7460b1 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_getyx.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_getyx.3x.html
@@ -45,14 +45,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        getyx,  getparyx,  getbegyx,  getmaxyx - get curses cursor
        and window coordinates
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        void getyx(WINDOW *win, int y, int x);
@@ -61,8 +59,7 @@
        void getmaxyx(WINDOW *win, int y, int x);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The getyx macro places the current cursor position of  the
        given window in the two integer variables y and x.
 
@@ -76,21 +73,18 @@
        window.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        The return values of these  macros  are  undefined  (i.e.,
        they  should not be used as the right-hand side of assign-
        ment statements).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        All of these interfaces are macros.  A "&" is  not  neces-
        sary before the variables y and x.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        The  getyx,  getparyx,  getbegyx  and  getmaxyx macros are
        described in the XSI Curses standard, Issue 4.
 
@@ -114,8 +108,7 @@
        getmaxyx.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_legacy(3x), curs_opaque(3x)
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_in_wch.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_in_wch.3x.html
index 96297347..9dd16a9b 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_in_wch.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_in_wch.3x.html
@@ -45,14 +45,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        in_wch,  mvin_wch,  mvwin_wch, win_wch - extract a complex
        character and rendition from a window
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int in_wch(cchar_t *wcval);
@@ -61,15 +59,13 @@
        int win_wch(WINDOW *win, cchar_t *wcval);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        These functions extract the complex character  and  rendi-
        tion  from  the  current position in the named window into
        the cchar_t object referenced by wcval.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        No errors are defined in the XSI  Curses  standard.   This
        implementation  checks  for  null pointers, returns ERR in
        that case.  Also, the mv routines check for  error  moving
@@ -81,19 +77,16 @@
        outside the window, or if the window pointer is null.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Note that all of these routines may be macros.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These functions are described in the XSI Curses  standard,
        Issue 4.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_inch(3x).
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_in_wchstr.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_in_wchstr.3x.html
index cfb7ef61..ae3b3a06 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_in_wchstr.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_in_wchstr.3x.html
@@ -45,16 +45,14 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        in_wchstr, in_wchnstr, win_wchstr, win_wchnstr,
        mvin_wchstr, mvin_wchnstr, mvwin_wchstr, mvwin_wchnstr -
        get an array of complex characters and renditions from a
        curses window
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int in_wchstr(cchar_t *wchstr);
@@ -67,8 +65,7 @@
        int mvwin_wchnstr(WINDOW *win, int y, int x, cchar_t *wchstr, int n);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        These functions return an array of complex  characters  in
        wchstr,  starting  at  the  current cursor position in the
        named window.  Attributes (rendition) are stored with  the
@@ -78,8 +75,7 @@
        str fill the array with at most n cchar_t elements.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Note that all routines except win_wchnstr may be macros.
 
        Reading a line that overflows the array pointed to by wch-
@@ -89,8 +85,7 @@
        recommended.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        Upon successful completion,  these  functions  return  OK.
        Otherwise, they return ERR.
 
@@ -99,15 +94,13 @@
        outside the window, or if the window pointer is null.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        The  XSI  Curses defines no error conditions.  This imple-
        mentation checks for null pointers, returning ERR in  that
        case.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        Functions:  curses(3x),  curs_in_wch(3x),  curs_instr(3x),
        curs_inwstr(3x) curs_inchstr(3x)
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_inch.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_inch.3x.html
index ec1e2c77..f7df04ff 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_inch.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_inch.3x.html
@@ -46,14 +46,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        inch,  winch,  mvinch,  mvwinch  -  get  a  character  and
        attributes from a curses window
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        chtype inch(void);
@@ -62,8 +60,7 @@
        chtype mvwinch(WINDOW *win, int y, int x);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        These routines return the character, of  type  chtype,  at
        the   current  position  in  the  named  window.   If  any
        attributes are set for that  position,  their  values  are
@@ -72,8 +69,7 @@
        to extract the character or attributes alone.
 
 
-
-

Attributes

+

Attributes

        The  following  bit-masks  may  be  AND-ed with characters
        returned by winch.
 
@@ -82,26 +78,22 @@
        A_COLOR        Bit-mask to extract color-pair field information
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        Functions with a "mv" prefix first perform a cursor  move-
        ment  using  wmove, and return an error if the position is
        outside the window, or if the window pointer is null.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Note that all of these routines may be macros.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These functions are described in the XSI Curses  standard,
        Issue 4.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x).
 
        Comparable  functions  in  the  wide-character  (ncursesw)
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_inchstr.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_inchstr.3x.html
index b2315950..2eb84bc7 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_inchstr.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_inchstr.3x.html
@@ -45,15 +45,13 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        inchstr, inchnstr, winchstr, winchnstr, mvinchstr,
        mvinchnstr, mvwinchstr, mvwinchnstr - get a string of
        characters (and attributes) from a curses window
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int inchstr(chtype *chstr);
@@ -67,8 +65,7 @@
        int n);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        These routines return a NULL-terminated  array  of  chtype
        quantities, starting at the current cursor position in the
        named window and ending at the right margin of the window.
@@ -80,8 +77,7 @@
        the chstr [see curs_inch(3x)].
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        All routines return the integer ERR upon  failure  and  an
        integer  value  other  than ERR upon successful completion
        (the number of  characters  retrieved,  exclusive  of  the
@@ -96,8 +92,7 @@
        outside the window, or if the window pointer is null.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Note  that  all  routines  except winchnstr may be macros.
        SVr4 does not document whether the result string is  zero-
        terminated;  it  does  not document whether a length limit
@@ -105,16 +100,14 @@
        the meaning of the return value.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  functions are described in the XSI Curses standard,
        Issue 4.  It is no more specific than the SVr4  documenta-
        tion on the trailing 0.  It does specify that the success-
        ful return of the functions is OK.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_inch(3x).
 
        Comparable functions in the wide-character (ncursesw)  li-
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_initscr.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_initscr.3x.html
index 3c47ac6c..09945199 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_initscr.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_initscr.3x.html
@@ -45,14 +45,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        initscr, newterm, endwin, isendwin, set_term, delscreen -
        curses screen initialization and manipulation routines
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        WINDOW *initscr(void);
@@ -63,11 +61,9 @@
        void delscreen(SCREEN* sp);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

 
-
-

initscr

+

initscr

        initscr is normally the first curses routine to call  when
        initializing  a program.  A few special routines sometimes
        need to be called before it; these are  slk_init,  filter,
@@ -82,8 +78,7 @@
        stdscr.
 
 
-
-

newterm

+

newterm

        A  program  that  outputs to more than one terminal should
        use the newterm  routine  for  each  terminal  instead  of
        initscr.  A program that needs to inspect capabilities, so
@@ -103,8 +98,7 @@
        If the type parameter is NULL, $TERM will be used.
 
 
-
-

endwin

+

endwin

        The  program must also call endwin for each terminal being
        used before exiting from curses.   If  newterm  is  called
        more  than  once for the same terminal, the first terminal
@@ -125,15 +119,13 @@
        es the program to resume visual mode.
 
 
-
-

isendwin

+

isendwin

        The isendwin routine  returns  TRUE  if  endwin  has  been
        called without any subsequent calls to wrefresh, and FALSE
        otherwise.
 
 
-
-

set_term

+

set_term

        The set_term routine is used to switch  between  different
        terminals.   The screen reference new becomes the new cur-
        rent terminal.  The previous terminal is returned  by  the
@@ -142,16 +134,14 @@
        rent terminal.
 
 
-
-

delscreen

+

delscreen

        The  delscreen  routine  frees storage associated with the
        SCREEN data structure.  The endwin  routine  does  not  do
        this, so delscreen should be called after endwin if a par-
        ticular SCREEN is no longer needed.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        endwin returns the integer ERR upon failure  and  OK  upon
        successful completion.
 
@@ -171,20 +161,17 @@
        o   set_term returns no error.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Note that initscr and newterm may be macros.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These functions were described in the XSI Curses standard,
        Issue 4.  As of 2015, the current document is X/Open Curs-
        es, Issue 7.
 
 
-
-

Differences

+

Differences

        X/Open specifies that portable applications must not  call
        initscr more than once:
 
@@ -200,8 +187,7 @@
        the return value of initscr in XSI Curses.
 
 
-
-

Unset TERM Variable

+

Unset TERM Variable

        If the TERM variable is missing or empty, initscr uses the
        value  "unknown", which normally corresponds to a terminal
        entry with the generic (gn) capability.   Generic  entries
@@ -211,8 +197,7 @@
        ly.
 
 
-
-

Signal Handlers

+

Signal Handlers

        Quoting from X/Open Curses, section 3.1.1:
 
             Curses implementations may provide for  special  han-
@@ -274,8 +259,7 @@
             stdscr, and update other data such as LINES and COLS.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x),       curs_kernel(3x),       curs_refresh(3x),
        curs_slk(3x), curs_terminfo(3x), curs_util(3x), curs_vari-
        ables(3x).
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_inopts.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_inopts.3x.html
index f0b18873..a7ab87a5 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_inopts.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_inopts.3x.html
@@ -45,16 +45,14 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        cbreak, nocbreak, echo, noecho, halfdelay, intrflush,
        keypad, meta, nodelay, notimeout, raw, noraw, noqiflush,
        qiflush, timeout, wtimeout, typeahead - curses input
        options
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int cbreak(void);
@@ -76,8 +74,7 @@
        int typeahead(int fd);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The ncurses library provides several functions  which  let
        an  application  change the way input from the terminal is
        handled.  Some are global, applying to all windows.   Oth-
@@ -87,8 +84,7 @@
        the same behavior is needed.
 
 
-
-

cbreak

+

cbreak

        Normally, the tty driver buffers typed characters until  a
        newline  or  carriage return is typed.  The cbreak routine
        disables line buffering and erase/kill  character-process-
@@ -105,8 +101,7 @@
        these routines interact with echo and noecho.]
 
 
-
-

echo/noecho

+

echo/noecho

        The  echo  and  noecho routines control whether characters
        typed by the user are echoed by getch as they  are  typed.
        Echoing by the tty driver is always disabled, but initial-
@@ -118,8 +113,7 @@
        interact with cbreak and nocbreak.]
 
 
-
-

halfdelay

+

halfdelay

        The  halfdelay  routine is used for half-delay mode, which
        is similar to cbreak mode in that characters typed by  the
        user  are  immediately available to the program.  However,
@@ -129,8 +123,7 @@
        half-delay mode.
 
 
-
-

intrflush

+

intrflush

        If  the  intrflush  option is enabled (bf is TRUE), and an
        interrupt key  is  pressed  on  the  keyboard  (interrupt,
        break,  quit),  all output in the tty driver queue will be
@@ -142,8 +135,7 @@
        nored.
 
 
-
-

keypad

+

keypad

        The  keypad option enables the keypad of the user's termi-
        nal.  If enabled (bf is TRUE), the user can press a  func-
        tion  key (such as an arrow key) and wgetch returns a sin-
@@ -157,8 +149,7 @@
        keypad is FALSE.
 
 
-
-

meta

+

meta

        Initially, whether the terminal returns 7 or 8 significant
        bits on input depends on the control mode of the tty driv-
        er  [see  termio(7)].  To force 8 bits to be returned, in-
@@ -173,8 +164,7 @@
        FALSE) is called.
 
 
-
-

nodelay

+

nodelay

        The nodelay option causes getch to be a non-blocking call.
        If  no input is ready, getch returns ERR.  If disabled (bf
        is FALSE), getch waits until a key is pressed.
@@ -187,8 +177,7 @@
        typed by a user.
 
 
-
-

raw/noraw

+

raw/noraw

        The  raw and noraw routines place the terminal into or out
        of raw mode.  Raw mode is similar to cbreak mode, in  that
        characters typed are immediately passed through to the us-
@@ -199,8 +188,7 @@
        bits in the tty driver that are not set by curses.
 
 
-
-

noqiflush

+

noqiflush

        When the noqiflush routine is used, normal flush of  input
        and  output queues associated with the INTR, QUIT and SUSP
        characters will not be done [see termio(7)].  When qiflush
@@ -210,8 +198,7 @@
        the interrupt had not occurred, after the handler exits.
 
 
-
-

timeout/wtimeout

+

timeout/wtimeout

        The timeout and wtimeout routines  set  blocking  or  non-
        blocking  read  for a given window.  If delay is negative,
        blocking read is used (i.e., waits  indefinitely  for  in-
@@ -224,8 +211,7 @@
        lay milliseconds (where delay is positive).
 
 
-
-

typeahead

+

typeahead

        The  curses  library  does "line-breakout optimization" by
        looking for  typeahead  periodically  while  updating  the
        screen.   If  input is found, and it is coming from a tty,
@@ -239,8 +225,7 @@
        typeahead checking is done.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        All  routines that return an integer return ERR upon fail-
        ure and OK (SVr4 specifies only "an  integer  value  other
        than  ERR")  upon  successful completion, unless otherwise
@@ -256,8 +241,7 @@
                    the range 1..255.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These functions are described in the XSI Curses  standard,
        Issue 4.
 
@@ -304,8 +288,7 @@
        used.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Note  that echo, noecho, halfdelay, intrflush, meta, node-
        lay, notimeout, noqiflush, qiflush, timeout, and  wtimeout
        may be macros.
@@ -318,8 +301,7 @@
        recommended.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x),       curs_getch(3x),        curs_initscr(3x),
        curs_util(3x), define_key(3x), termio(7)
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_ins_wch.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_ins_wch.3x.html
index 27f87cad..a15984d5 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_ins_wch.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_ins_wch.3x.html
@@ -45,14 +45,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        ins_wch,  mvins_wch,  mvwins_wch, wins_wch - insert a com-
        plex character and rendition into a window
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int ins_wch(const cchar_t *wch);
@@ -62,8 +60,7 @@
        *wch);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        These routines, insert the complex character wch with ren-
        dition before the character under the cursor.  All charac-
        ters to the right of the cursor are moved one space to the
@@ -72,8 +69,7 @@
        change the cursor position.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        If successful, these functions return OK.   If  not,  they
        return ERR.
 
@@ -82,13 +78,11 @@
        outside the window, or if the window pointer is null.
 
 
-
-

ERRORS

+

ERRORS

        No errors are defined.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_insch(3x).
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_ins_wstr.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_ins_wstr.3x.html
index 289df513..89b5d006 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_ins_wstr.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_ins_wstr.3x.html
@@ -45,15 +45,13 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        ins_wstr, ins_nwstr, wins_wstr, wins_nwstr, mvins_wstr,
        mvins_nwstr, mvwins_wstr, mvwins_nwstr - insert a wide-
        character string into a curses window
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int ins_wstr(const wchar_t *wstr);
@@ -66,8 +64,7 @@
        int mvwins_nwstr(WINDOW *win, int y, int x, const wchar_t *wstr, int n);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        These  routines insert a wchar_t character string (as many
        characters as will fit on the line) before  the  character
        under the cursor.  All characters to the right of the cur-
@@ -91,8 +88,7 @@
        ter.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Note that all but wins_nwstr may be macros.
 
        If the first character in the string is a nonspacing char-
@@ -101,8 +97,7 @@
        trol character.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        Upon successful completion,  these  functions  return  OK.
        Otherwise, they return ERR.
 
@@ -111,8 +106,7 @@
        outside the window, or if the window pointer is null.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x),        curs_insstr(3x),       curs_in_wch(3x),
        curs_ins_wch(3x).
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_insch.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_insch.3x.html
index e337392d..d6638074 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_insch.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_insch.3x.html
@@ -45,14 +45,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        insch,  winsch,  mvinsch,  mvwinsch  -  insert a character
        before cursor in a curses window
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int insch(chtype ch);
@@ -61,8 +59,7 @@
        int mvwinsch(WINDOW *win, int y, int x, chtype ch);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        These routines insert the character ch before the  charac-
        ter  under the cursor.  All characters to the right of the
        cursor are moved one space to the right, with  the  possi-
@@ -71,8 +68,7 @@
        tion.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        All  routines that return an integer return ERR upon fail-
        ure and OK (SVr4 specifies only "an  integer  value  other
        than  ERR")  upon  successful completion, unless otherwise
@@ -83,22 +79,19 @@
        outside the window, or if the window pointer is null.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        These routines do not necessarily imply use of a  hardware
        insert character feature.
 
        Note that insch, mvinsch, and mvwinsch may be macros.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  functions are described in the XSI Curses standard,
        Issue 4.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x).
 
        Comparable  functions  in  the  wide-character  (ncursesw)
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_insstr.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_insstr.3x.html
index fc2428f8..becdc103 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_insstr.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_insstr.3x.html
@@ -45,15 +45,13 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        insstr,  insnstr,  winsstr, winsnstr, mvinsstr, mvinsnstr,
        mvwinsstr, mvwinsnstr - insert string before cursor  in  a
        curses window
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
        int insstr(const char *str);
        int insnstr(const char *str, int n);
@@ -66,8 +64,7 @@
        int n);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        These routines insert a character string (as many  charac-
        ters  as  will fit on the line) before the character under
        the cursor.  All characters to the right of the cursor are
@@ -81,8 +78,7 @@
        Special characters are handled as in addch.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        All routines that return an integer return ERR upon  fail-
        ure  and  OK  (SVr4 specifies only "an integer value other
        than ERR") upon successful  completion,  unless  otherwise
@@ -97,13 +93,11 @@
        outside the window, or if the window pointer is null.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Note that all but winsnstr may be macros.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  functions are described in the XSI Curses standard,
        Issue 4, which adds const qualifiers to the arguments.
 
@@ -114,8 +108,7 @@
        inconsistency.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_util(3x), curs_clear(3x), curs_inch(3x).
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_instr.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_instr.3x.html
index 16c40ded..da74fd1a 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_instr.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_instr.3x.html
@@ -45,15 +45,13 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        instr,  innstr, winstr, winnstr, mvinstr, mvinnstr, mvwin-
        str, mvwinnstr - get a string of characters from a  curses
        window
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int instr(char *str);
@@ -67,8 +65,7 @@
        n);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        These routines return  a  string  of  characters  in  str,
        extracted  starting  at the current cursor position in the
        named window.  Attributes are stripped  from  the  charac-
@@ -77,8 +74,7 @@
        (exclusive of the trailing NUL).
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        All  of the functions return ERR upon failure, or the num-
        ber of characters actually read into the string.
 
@@ -91,13 +87,11 @@
        outside the window, or if the window pointer is null.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Note that all routines except winnstr may be macros.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        SVr4 does not document whether a length limit includes  or
        excludes the trailing NUL.
 
@@ -106,8 +100,7 @@
        return the string ending at the right margin.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x).
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_inwstr.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_inwstr.3x.html
index 8f5c3ca8..c63b182d 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_inwstr.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_inwstr.3x.html
@@ -45,15 +45,13 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        inwstr,  innwstr,  winwstr, winnwstr, mvinwstr, mvinnwstr,
        mvwinwstr, mvwinnwstr - get a string of wchar_t characters
        from a curses window
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int inwstr(wchar_t *str);
@@ -66,8 +64,7 @@
        int mvwinnwstr(WINDOW *win, int y, int x, wchar_t *str, int n);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        These  routines  return  a string of wchar_t characters in
        wstr, extracted starting at the current cursor position in
        the  named window.  Attributes are stripped from the char-
@@ -81,13 +78,11 @@
        character, an error is generated.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Note that all routines except winnwstr may be macros.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        All routines return ERR upon failure. Upon successful com-
        pletion, the *inwstr routines return OK, and the  *innwstr
        routines  return  the  number  of characters read into the
@@ -98,8 +93,7 @@
        outside the window, or if the window pointer is null.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_instr(3x), curs_in_wchstr(3x)
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_kernel.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_kernel.3x.html
index 57e64085..22eeefee 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_kernel.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_kernel.3x.html
@@ -45,15 +45,13 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        def_prog_mode, def_shell_mode, reset_prog_mode,
        reset_shell_mode, resetty, savetty, getsyx, setsyx,
        ripoffline, curs_set, napms - low-level curses routines
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int def_prog_mode(void);
@@ -69,15 +67,13 @@
        int napms(int ms);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The  following  routines  give low-level access to various
        curses capabilities.  These routines  typically  are  used
        inside library routines.
 
 
-
-

def_prog_mode, def_shell_mode

+

def_prog_mode, def_shell_mode

        The  def_prog_mode  and  def_shell_mode  routines save the
        current terminal modes as the  "program"  (in  curses)  or
        "shell"   (not  in  curses)  state  for  use  by  the  re-
@@ -86,8 +82,7 @@
        each screen context allocated by newterm().
 
 
-
-

reset_prog_mode, reset_shell_mode

+

reset_prog_mode, reset_shell_mode

        The reset_prog_mode and reset_shell_mode routines  restore
        the  terminal  to "program" (in curses) or "shell" (out of
        curses) state.  These are  done  automatically  by  endwin
@@ -95,16 +90,14 @@
        not called.
 
 
-
-

resetty, savetty

+

resetty, savetty

        The resetty and savetty  routines  save  and  restore  the
        state  of  the  terminal modes.  savetty saves the current
        state in a buffer and resetty restores the state  to  what
        it was at the last call to savetty.
 
 
-
-

getsyx

+

getsyx

        The  getsyx routine returns the current coordinates of the
        virtual screen cursor in y and x.  If leaveok is currently
        TRUE,  then -1,-1 is returned.  If lines have been removed
@@ -113,8 +106,7 @@
        as arguments for setsyx.
 
 
-
-

setsyx

+

setsyx

        The setsyx routine sets the virtual screen cursor to y, x.
        If y and x are both -1, then leaveok is set.  The two rou-
        tines getsyx and setsyx are designed to be used by  a  li-
@@ -126,8 +118,7 @@
        doupdate.
 
 
-
-

ripoffline

+

ripoffline

        The ripoffline routine provides access to the same facili-
        ty  that  slk_init  [see  curs_slk(3x)] uses to reduce the
        size of the screen.   ripoffline  must  be  called  before
@@ -159,8 +150,7 @@
        initscr or newterm.
 
 
-
-

curs_set

+

curs_set

        The curs_set routine sets the cursor state  to  invisible,
        normal, or very visible for visibility equal to 0, 1, or 2
        respectively.  If the terminal supports the visibility re-
@@ -168,13 +158,11 @@
        ERR is returned.
 
 
-
-

napms

+

napms

        The napms routine is used to sleep for ms milliseconds.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        Except for curs_set, these routines always return OK.
 
        curs_set returns the previous cursor state, or ERR if  the
@@ -194,8 +182,7 @@
             lines exceeds the maximum (NRIPS = 5).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Note that getsyx is a macro, so & is not necessary  before
        the variables y and x.
 
@@ -211,8 +198,7 @@
        to restore that.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        The functions setsyx and getsyx are not described  in  the
        XSI  Curses standard, Issue 4.  All other functions are as
        described in XSI Curses.
@@ -222,8 +208,7 @@
        macros with no documented semantics for the return value.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_initscr(3x),  curs_outopts(3x),  curs_re-
        fresh(3x),   curs_scr_dump(3x),  curs_slk(3x),  curs_vari-
        ables(3x).
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_legacy.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_legacy.3x.html
index 45ba3ac5..991037b3 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_legacy.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_legacy.3x.html
@@ -45,14 +45,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        curs_legacy  -  get  curses cursor and window coordinates,
        attributes
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int getattrs(WINDOW *win);
@@ -66,8 +64,7 @@
        int getpary(WINDOW *win);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The getbegy and getbegx functions return the same data  as
        getbegyx.
 
@@ -81,14 +78,12 @@
        getparyx.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        These functions return an integer, or ERR  if  the  window
        parameter is null.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        All  of  these interfaces are provided as macros and func-
        tions.  The macros are suppressed (and only the  functions
        provided)  when  NCURSES_OPAQUE  is defined.  The standard
@@ -98,14 +93,12 @@
        the WINDOW structure.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These functions were supported on Version 7, BSD or System
        V implementations.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_getyx(3x), curs_opaque(3x)
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_memleaks.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_memleaks.3x.html
index b36442c4..d94946c6 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_memleaks.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_memleaks.3x.html
@@ -45,22 +45,19 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        _nc_freeall _nc_free_and_exit - curses memory-leak
        checking
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        void _nc_freeall(void);
        void _nc_free_and_exit(int);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        These functions are used to simplify  analysis  of  memory
        leaks  in  the  ncurses  library.   They  are normally not
        available; they must be configured  into  the  library  at
@@ -84,18 +81,15 @@
        code to pass to the exit routine.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        These functions do not return a value.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These functions are not part of the XSI interface.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x).
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_mouse.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_mouse.3x.html
index f4951c1c..383685d5 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_mouse.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_mouse.3x.html
@@ -46,15 +46,13 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        has_mouse, getmouse, ungetmouse, mousemask, wenclose,
        mouse_trafo, wmouse_trafo, mouseinterval - mouse interface
        through curses
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        typedef unsigned long mmask_t;
@@ -76,15 +74,13 @@
        int mouseinterval(int erval);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        These  functions provide an interface to mouse events from
        ncurses(3x).  Mouse events are  represented  by  KEY_MOUSE
        pseudo-key values in the wgetch input stream.
 
 
-
-

mousemask

+

mousemask

        To  make mouse events visible, use the mousemask function.
        This will set the mouse events to  be  reported.   By  de-
        fault,  no  mouse  events are reported.  The function will
@@ -99,8 +95,7 @@
        Whether this happens is device-dependent.
 
 
-
-

Mouse events

+

Mouse events

        Here are the mouse event type masks which may be defined:
 
        Name                     Description
@@ -145,8 +140,7 @@
        ---------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 
-
-

getmouse

+

getmouse

        Once a class of mouse events has been made  visible  in  a
        window, calling the wgetch function on that window may re-
        turn KEY_MOUSE as an indicator that a mouse event has been
@@ -162,16 +156,14 @@
        next older item from the queue.
 
 
-
-

ungetmouse

+

ungetmouse

        The ungetmouse function behaves  analogously  to  ungetch.
        It  pushes a KEY_MOUSE event onto the input queue, and as-
        sociates with that event the given state data and  screen-
        relative character-cell coordinates.
 
 
-
-

wenclose

+

wenclose

        The  wenclose  function  tests  whether  a  given  pair of
        screen-relative character-cell coordinates is enclosed  by
        a  given  window, returning TRUE if it is and FALSE other-
@@ -179,8 +171,7 @@
        screen windows enclose the location of a mouse event.
 
 
-
-

wmouse_trafo

+

wmouse_trafo

        The wmouse_trafo function transforms a given pair of coor-
        dinates from stdscr-relative  coordinates  to  coordinates
        relative to the given window or vice versa.  The resulting
@@ -211,14 +202,12 @@
            nates if the transformation was successful.
 
 
-
-

mouse_trafo

+

mouse_trafo

        The mouse_trafo function performs the same translation  as
        wmouse_trafo, using stdscr for win.
 
 
-
-

mouseinterval

+

mouseinterval

        The mouseinterval function sets the maximum time (in thou-
        sands of a second) that can elapse between press  and  re-
        lease  events  for  them to be recognized as a click.  Use
@@ -228,8 +217,7 @@
        default is one sixth of a second.
 
 
-
-

has_mouse

+

has_mouse

        The  has_mouse  function  returns TRUE if the mouse driver
        has been successfully initialized.
 
@@ -239,8 +227,7 @@
        str that expects a linefeed for input-loop termination.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        getmouse  and ungetmouse return the integer ERR upon fail-
        ure or OK upon successful completion:
 
@@ -266,8 +253,7 @@
        TRUE or FALSE depending on their test result.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  calls  were  designed  for ncurses(3x), and are not
        found in SVr4 curses, 4.4BSD curses, or any other previous
        version of curses.
@@ -322,8 +308,7 @@
        ton-releases.
 
 
-
-

BUGS

+

BUGS

        Mouse events under xterm will not in fact be ignored  dur-
        ing  cooked  mode, if they have been enabled by mousemask.
        Instead, the xterm mouse report sequence  will  appear  in
@@ -345,8 +330,7 @@
        events.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x),  curs_kernel(3x),   curs_slk(3x),   curs_vari-
        ables(3x).
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_move.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_move.3x.html
index 3a494262..11521941 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_move.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_move.3x.html
@@ -45,21 +45,18 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        move, wmove - move curses window cursor
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int move(int y, int x);
        int wmove(WINDOW *win, int y, int x);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        These  routines move the cursor associated with the window
        to line y and column x.  This routine does  not  move  the
        physical  cursor  of the terminal until refresh is called.
@@ -67,8 +64,7 @@
        corner of the window, which is (0,0).
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        These routines return ERR upon failure and OK (SVr4 speci-
        fies only "an integer value other than ERR") upon success-
        ful completion.
@@ -77,19 +73,16 @@
        is null, or if the position is outside the window.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Note that move may be a macro.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These functions are described in the XSI Curses  standard,
        Issue 4.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_refresh(3x)
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_opaque.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_opaque.3x.html
index 0c23a533..5b0c7163 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_opaque.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_opaque.3x.html
@@ -45,16 +45,14 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        is_cleared, is_idlok, is_idcok, is_immedok, is_keypad,
        is_leaveok, is_nodelay, is_notimeout, is_pad, is_scrollok,
        is_subwin, is_syncok, wgetdelay, wgetparent, wgetscrreg -
        curses window properties
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        bool is_cleared(const WINDOW *win);
@@ -74,8 +72,7 @@
        int wgetscrreg(const WINDOW *win, int *top, int *bottom);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        This implementation provides functions which return  prop-
        erties  set  in  the  WINDOW  structure, allowing it to be
        "opaque" if the symbol NCURSES_OPAQUE is defined:
@@ -130,26 +127,22 @@
             margin as set in wsetscrreg.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        These functions all return TRUE or FALSE, except as noted.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Both a macro and a function are provided for each name.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These routines are specific to  ncurses.   They  were  not
        supported  on  Version 7, BSD or System V implementations.
        It is recommended that any code depending on  ncurses  ex-
        tensions be conditioned using NCURSES_VERSION.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x),  curs_inopts(3x),  curs_outopts(3x), curs_win-
        dow(3x)
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_outopts.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_outopts.3x.html
index d6f6b7d6..4126dbb2 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_outopts.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_outopts.3x.html
@@ -45,14 +45,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        clearok, idlok, idcok, immedok, leaveok, setscrreg,
        wsetscrreg, scrollok, nl, nonl - curses output options
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int clearok(WINDOW *win, bool bf);
@@ -67,16 +65,14 @@
        int nonl(void);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        These routines set options that change the style of output
        within  curses.   All  options are initially FALSE, unless
        otherwise stated.  It is not necessary to turn  these  op-
        tions off before calling endwin.
 
 
-
-

clearok

+

clearok

        If  clearok is called with TRUE as argument, the next call
        to wrefresh with this window will clear  the  screen  com-
        pletely  and  redraw the entire screen from scratch.  This
@@ -87,8 +83,7 @@
        screen to be cleared and repainted from scratch.
 
 
-
-

idlok

+

idlok

        If idlok is called with TRUE as  second  argument,  curses
        considers using the hardware insert/delete line feature of
        terminals so equipped.  Calling idlok with FALSE as second
@@ -102,8 +97,7 @@
        lines.
 
 
-
-

idcok

+

idcok

        If idcok is called with FALSE as second  argument,  curses
        no longer considers using the hardware insert/delete char-
        acter feature of terminals so equipped.  Use of  character
@@ -112,8 +106,7 @@
        tion and deletion.
 
 
-
-

immedok

+

immedok

        If  immedok is called with TRUE as argument, any change in
        the window image, such as the ones caused by waddch, wclr-
        tobot,  wscrl,  etc.,  automatically  cause a call to wre-
@@ -122,8 +115,7 @@
        fault.
 
 
-
-

leaveok

+

leaveok

        Normally, the hardware cursor is left at the  location  of
        the window cursor being refreshed.  The leaveok option al-
        lows the cursor to be left wherever the update happens  to
@@ -131,8 +123,7 @@
        is not used, since it reduces the need for cursor motions.
 
 
-
-

setscrreg

+

setscrreg

        The setscrreg and wsetscrreg routines allow  the  applica-
        tion  programmer  to  set a software scrolling region in a
        window.  The top and bot parameters are the  line  numbers
@@ -149,8 +140,7 @@
        will probably be used by the output routines.)
 
 
-
-

scrollok

+

scrollok

        The  scrollok option controls what happens when the cursor
        of a window is  moved  off  the  edge  of  the  window  or
        scrolling  region,  either as a result of a newline action
@@ -162,8 +152,7 @@
        call idlok).
 
 
-
-

nl, nonl

+

nl, nonl

        The  nl  and  nonl routines control whether the underlying
        display device translates the return key into  newline  on
        input,  and  whether it translates newline into return and
@@ -176,8 +165,7 @@
        the return key.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        The functions setscrreg and wsetscrreg return OK upon suc-
        cess and ERR upon failure.  All other routines that return
        an integer always return OK.
@@ -200,8 +188,7 @@
        mentation returns an error if the window pointer is null.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  functions are described in the XSI Curses standard,
        Issue 4.
 
@@ -230,8 +217,7 @@
        not.  Use curs_set to make the cursor invisible.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Note that clearok, leaveok, scrollok, idcok, nl, nonl  and
        setscrreg may be macros.
 
@@ -239,8 +225,7 @@
        terminal emulators.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_addch(3x), curs_clear(3x),
        curs_initscr(3x), curs_scroll(3x), curs_refresh(3x),
        curs_variables(3x).
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_overlay.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_overlay.3x.html
index c10da1aa..573cb9c2 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_overlay.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_overlay.3x.html
@@ -45,14 +45,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        overlay, overwrite, copywin - overlay and manipulate
        overlapped curses windows
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int overlay(const WINDOW *srcwin, WINDOW *dstwin);
@@ -63,11 +61,9 @@
              int dmaxcol, int overlay);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

 
-
-

overlay, overwrite

+

overlay, overwrite

        The  overlay  and overwrite routines overlay srcwin on top
        of dstwin.  scrwin and dstwin are not required to  be  the
        same  size;  only  text  where  the two windows overlap is
@@ -75,8 +71,7 @@
        (blanks are not copied) whereas overwrite is destructive.
 
 
-
-

copywin

+

copywin

        The  copywin  routine provides a finer granularity of con-
        trol over the overlay and overwrite routines.  As  in  the
        prefresh routine, a rectangle is specified in the destina-
@@ -86,8 +81,7 @@
        then copying is non-destructive, as in overlay.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        Routines  that  return an integer return ERR upon failure,
        and OK (SVr4 only specifies "an integer value  other  than
        ERR") upon successful completion.
@@ -98,21 +92,18 @@
        the window would be placed off-screen.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Note that overlay and overwrite may be macros.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        The XSI Curses standard, Issue 4 describes these functions
        (adding the const qualifiers).  It further specifies their
        behavior in the presence of characters with multibyte ren-
        ditions (not yet supported in this implementation).
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_pad(3x), curs_refresh(3x)
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_pad.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_pad.3x.html
index b5aee87d..250f8a93 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_pad.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_pad.3x.html
@@ -45,14 +45,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        newpad, subpad, prefresh, pnoutrefresh, pechochar,
        pecho_wchar - create and display curses pads
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        WINDOW *newpad(int nlines, int ncols);
@@ -66,11 +64,9 @@
        int pecho_wchar(WINDOW *pad, const cchar_t *wch);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

 
-
-

newpad

+

newpad

        The newpad routine creates and returns a pointer to a  new
        pad data structure with the given number of lines, nlines,
        and columns, ncols.  A pad is like a window,  except  that
@@ -87,8 +83,7 @@
        to be used for the display.
 
 
-
-

subpad

+

subpad

        The subpad routine creates and returns a pointer to a sub-
        window within a  pad  with  the  given  number  of  lines,
        nlines,  and  columns,  ncols.   Unlike subwin, which uses
@@ -100,8 +95,7 @@
        fore calling prefresh.
 
 
-
-

prefresh, pnoutrefresh

+

prefresh, pnoutrefresh

        The  prefresh  and  pnoutrefresh routines are analogous to
        wrefresh and wnoutrefresh except that they relate to  pads
        instead  of windows.  The additional parameters are needed
@@ -118,8 +112,7 @@
        col, sminrow, or smincol are treated as if they were zero.
 
 
-
-

pechochar

+

pechochar

        The pechochar routine is functionally equivalent to a call
        to  addch  followed by a call to refresh, a call to waddch
        followed by a call to wrefresh, or a call to  waddch  fol-
@@ -132,16 +125,14 @@
        arguments to prefresh.
 
 
-
-

pecho_wchar

+

pecho_wchar

        The  pecho_wchar  function is the analogous wide-character
        form of pechochar.  It outputs one character to a pad  and
        immediately  refreshes the pad.  It does this by a call to
        wadd_wch followed by a call to prefresh.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        Routines that return an integer return  ERR  upon  failure
        and  OK  (SVr4 only specifies "an integer value other than
        ERR") upon successful completion.
@@ -169,19 +160,16 @@
                turns an error.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Note that pechochar may be a macro.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        The  XSI  Curses  standard,  Issue 4 describes these func-
        tions.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x),  curs_refresh(3x),  curs_touch(3x),  curs_add-
        ch(3x).
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_print.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_print.3x.html
index 508f964d..a954e859 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_print.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_print.3x.html
@@ -45,20 +45,17 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        mcprint - ship binary data to printer
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int mcprint(char *data, int len);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        This  function  uses the mc5p or mc4 and mc5 capabilities,
        if they are present, to  ship  given  data  to  a  printer
        attached to the terminal.
@@ -73,8 +70,7 @@
        sleep for a second after shipping each 80-character line.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        The mcprint function returns ERR if  the  write  operation
        aborted for some reason.  In this case, errno will contain
        either an error associated with write(2)  or  one  of  the
@@ -91,21 +87,18 @@
        actually sent to the printer.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        The  mcprint call was designed for ncurses(3x), and is not
        found in SVr4 curses, 4.4BSD curses, or any other previous
        version of curses.
 
 
-
-

BUGS

+

BUGS

        Padding  in the mc5p, mc4 and mc5 capabilities will not be
        interpreted.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x)
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_printw.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_printw.3x.html
index ae9aead4..1a357f31 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_printw.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_printw.3x.html
@@ -45,14 +45,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        printw, wprintw, mvprintw, mvwprintw, vwprintw, vw_printw
        - print formatted output in curses windows
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int printw(const char *fmt, ...);
@@ -66,8 +64,7 @@
        glist);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The  printw,  wprintw, mvprintw and mvwprintw routines are
        analogous to  printf  [see  printf(3)].   In  effect,  the
        string that would be output by printf is output instead as
@@ -80,8 +77,7 @@
        <stdarg.h>.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        Routines that return an integer return  ERR  upon  failure
        and  OK  (SVr4 only specifies "an integer value other than
        ERR") upon successful completion.
@@ -96,8 +92,7 @@
        outside the window, or if the window pointer is null.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        The  XSI  Curses  standard,  Issue 4 describes these func-
        tions.  The function vwprintw is marked TO  BE  WITHDRAWN,
        and  is  to  be replaced by a function vw_printw using the
@@ -109,8 +104,7 @@
        is included in <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), printf(3), vprintf(3)
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_refresh.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_refresh.3x.html
index b739e075..024119e2 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_refresh.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_refresh.3x.html
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 
 
 
@@ -45,14 +45,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        doupdate, redrawwin, refresh, wnoutrefresh, wredrawln,
        wrefresh - refresh curses windows and lines
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int refresh(void);
@@ -63,8 +61,9 @@
        int wredrawln(WINDOW *win, int beg_line, int num_lines);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

+
+

refresh/wrefresh

        The refresh and wrefresh  routines  (or  wnoutrefresh  and
        doupdate)  must be called to get actual output to the ter-
        minal, as other routines  merely  manipulate  data  struc-
@@ -76,6 +75,8 @@
        minal is left at the location of the cursor for that  win-
        dow.
 
+
+

wnoutrefresh/doupdate

        The  wnoutrefresh and doupdate routines allow multiple up-
        dates with more efficiency than wrefresh alone.  In  addi-
        tion  to  all the window structures, curses keeps two data
@@ -108,6 +109,8 @@
        see the section on PORTABILITY below for a  warning  about
        exploiting this behavior.)
 
+
+

wredrawln/redrawwin

        The wredrawln routine indicates to curses that some screen
        lines are corrupted and should be thrown away before  any-
        thing  is  written  over  them.   It touches the indicated
@@ -115,8 +118,7 @@
        touches the entire window.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        Routines  that  return an integer return ERR upon failure,
        and OK (SVr4 only specifies "an integer value  other  than
        ERR") upon successful completion.
@@ -124,22 +126,20 @@
        X/Open  does not define any error conditions.  In this im-
        plementation
 
-              wnoutrefresh
-                   returns an error  if  the  window  pointer  is
-                   null, or if the window is really a pad.
+          wnoutrefresh
+               returns an error if the window pointer is null, or
+               if the window is really a pad.
 
-              wredrawln
-                   returns  an  error  if  the associated call to
-                   touchln returns an error.
+          wredrawln
+               returns an error if the associated call to touchln
+               returns an error.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Note that refresh and redrawwin may be macros.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        The XSI Curses standard, Issue  4  describes  these  func-
        tions.
 
@@ -153,8 +153,7 @@
        antee an entire-contents copy anywhere.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_outopts(3x) curs_variables(3x).
 
 
@@ -165,7 +164,13 @@
-

NAME

+

NAME

        scanw, wscanw, mvscanw, mvwscanw, vwscanw, vw_scanw - con-
        vert formatted input from a curses window
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int scanw(char *fmt, ...);
@@ -63,8 +61,7 @@
        int vwscanw(WINDOW *win, char *fmt, va_list varglist);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The scanw, wscanw and mvscanw routines  are  analogous  to
        scanf  [see scanf(3)].  The effect of these routines is as
        though wgetstr were called on the window, and the  result-
@@ -77,8 +74,7 @@
        ments, as defined in <stdarg.h>.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        vwscanw returns ERR on failure and an integer equal to the
        number of fields scanned on success.
 
@@ -91,8 +87,7 @@
        outside the window, or if the window pointer is null.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        The XSI Curses standard, Issue  4  describes  these  func-
        tions.   The  function  vwscanw is marked TO BE WITHDRAWN,
        and is to be replaced by a  function  vw_scanw  using  the
@@ -116,8 +111,7 @@
        something was processed.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_getstr(3x), curs_printw(3x), scanf(3)
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_scr_dump.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_scr_dump.3x.html
index 799cba9e..9ecfac5d 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_scr_dump.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_scr_dump.3x.html
@@ -45,14 +45,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        scr_dump, scr_restore, scr_init, scr_set - read (write) a
        curses screen from (to) a file
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int scr_dump(const char *filename);
@@ -61,8 +59,7 @@
        int scr_set(const char *filename);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The scr_dump routine dumps the  current  contents  of  the
        virtual screen to the file filename.
 
@@ -93,8 +90,7 @@
        and putwin routines [see curs_util(3x)].
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        All  routines  return  the integer ERR upon failure and OK
        upon success.
 
@@ -103,14 +99,12 @@
        opened.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Note  that  scr_init,  scr_set,  and  scr_restore  may  be
        macros.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        The  XSI  Curses  standard, Issue 4, describes these func-
        tions (adding the const qualifiers).
 
@@ -119,8 +113,7 @@
        is old" but do not define "old".
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x),      curs_initscr(3x),       curs_refresh(3x),
        curs_util(3x), system(3)
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_scroll.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_scroll.3x.html
index bef6212c..1d5c8e9d 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_scroll.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_scroll.3x.html
@@ -45,13 +45,11 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        scroll, scrl, wscrl - scroll a curses window
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int scroll(WINDOW *win);
@@ -59,8 +57,7 @@
        int wscrl(WINDOW *win, int n);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The  scroll  routine scrolls the window up one line.  This
        involves moving the lines in the  window  data  structure.
        As  an optimization, if the scrolling region of the window
@@ -77,8 +74,7 @@
        scrollok.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        These routines return ERR upon failure, and OK (SVr4  only
        specifies "an integer value other than ERR") upon success-
        ful completion.
@@ -90,8 +86,7 @@
        e.g., with scrollok.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Note that scrl and scroll may be macros.
 
        The SVr4 documentation says that the optimization of phys-
@@ -108,14 +103,12 @@
        plementation it is.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        The  XSI  Curses  standard,  Issue 4 describes these func-
        tions.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_outopts(3x)
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_slk.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_slk.3x.html
index cb77f432..3c9e054a 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_slk.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_slk.3x.html
@@ -45,8 +45,7 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        slk_init, slk_set, slk_wset, slk_refresh, slk_noutrefresh,
        slk_label, slk_clear, slk_restore, slk_touch, slk_attron,
        slk_attrset, slk_attroff, slk_attr_on, slk_attr_set,
@@ -54,8 +53,7 @@
        routines
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int slk_init(int fmt);
@@ -78,8 +76,7 @@
        int slk_wset(int labnum, const wchar_t *label, int fmt);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The slk* functions manipulate the set of soft function-key
        labels  that exist on many terminals.  For those terminals
        that do not have soft labels, curses takes over the bottom
@@ -153,8 +150,7 @@
        line of the screen.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        These routines return ERR upon failure and OK (SVr4 speci-
        fies only "an integer value other than ERR") upon success-
        ful completion.
@@ -201,14 +197,12 @@
                    be allocated.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Most applications would use slk_noutrefresh because a wre-
        fresh is likely to follow soon.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        The XSI Curses standard, Issue 4,  describes  these  func-
        tions.   It changes the argument type of the attribute-ma-
        nipulation functions slk_attron, slk_attroff,  slk_attrset
@@ -217,8 +211,7 @@
        cific to ncurses.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x),   curs_attr(3x),   curs_initscr(3x),  curs_re-
        fresh(3x), curs_variables(3x).
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_sp_funcs.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_sp_funcs.3x.html
index c85498ba..45e09261 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_sp_funcs.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_sp_funcs.3x.html
@@ -48,13 +48,11 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        curs_sp_funcs - curses screen-pointer extension
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int assume_default_colors_sp(SCREEN*, int, int);
@@ -187,8 +185,7 @@
        int tputs_sp(SCREEN*, const char *, int, NCURSES_SP_OUTC);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        This  implementation can be configured to provide a set of
        functions which improve the  ability  to  manage  multiple
        screens.  This feature can be added to any of the configu-
@@ -196,8 +193,7 @@
        without changing the meaning of any of the existing ones.
 
 
-
-

IMPROVED FUNCTIONS

+

IMPROVED FUNCTIONS

        Most  of  the functions are new versions of existing func-
        tions.  A parameter is added at the front of the parameter
        list.  It is a SCREEN pointer.
@@ -208,8 +204,7 @@
        which must be modified to update multiple screens.
 
 
-
-

NEW FUNCTIONS

+

NEW FUNCTIONS

        Here are the new functions:
 
        ceiling_panel
@@ -232,8 +227,7 @@
             initialization.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        This extension introduces some new names:
 
        NCURSES_SP_FUNCS
@@ -262,16 +256,14 @@
             stream, e.g., curs_terminfo(3x).
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  routines  are  specific  to ncurses.  They were not
        supported on Version 7, BSD or System  V  implementations.
        It  is  recommended that any code depending on ncurses ex-
        tensions be conditioned using NCURSES_SP_FUNCS.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_opaque(3x), curs_threads(3x).
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_termattrs.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_termattrs.3x.html
index 37d2c980..024695b0 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_termattrs.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_termattrs.3x.html
@@ -45,15 +45,13 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        baudrate, erasechar, erasewchar, has_ic, has_il, killchar,
        killwchar, longname,  term_attrs,  termattrs,  termname  -
        curses environment query routines
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int baudrate(void);
@@ -69,18 +67,15 @@
        char *termname(void);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

 
-
-

baudrate

+

baudrate

        The  baudrate routine returns the output speed of the ter-
        minal.  The number returned is in  bits  per  second,  for
        example 9600, and is an integer.
 
 
-
-

erasechar, erasewchar

+

erasechar, erasewchar

        The  erasechar  routine  returns  the user's current erase
        character.
 
@@ -90,8 +85,7 @@
        erenced by ch is not changed.
 
 
-
-

has_is, has_il

+

has_is, has_il

        The has_ic routine is true if the terminal has insert- and
        delete- character capabilities.
 
@@ -102,8 +96,7 @@
        scrollok.
 
 
-
-

killchar, killwchar

+

killchar, killwchar

        The killchar routine returns the user's current line  kill
        character.
 
@@ -113,8 +106,7 @@
        location referenced by ch is not changed.
 
 
-
-

longname

+

longname

        The longname routine returns a pointer to  a  static  area
        containing  a verbose description of the current terminal.
        The maximum length of a verbose description is 128 charac-
@@ -125,8 +117,7 @@
        used with multiple terminals.
 
 
-
-

termattrs, term_attrs

+

termattrs, term_attrs

        If  a  given  terminal  does not support a video attribute
        that an application program is trying to use,  curses  may
        substitute  a  different video attribute for it.  The ter-
@@ -137,14 +128,12 @@
        appearance of the screen.
 
 
-
-

termname

+

termname

        The termname routine returns the  terminal  name  used  by
        setupterm.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        longname and termname return NULL on error.
 
        Routines  that  return  an integer return ERR upon failure
@@ -152,21 +141,18 @@
        ERR") upon successful completion.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Note that termattrs may be a macro.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        The  XSI  Curses  standard,  Issue 4 describes these func-
        tions.  It changes the return type of termattrs to the new
        type  attr_t.  Most versions of curses truncate the result
        returned by termname to 14 characters.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_initscr(3x), curs_outopts(3x)
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_termcap.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_termcap.3x.html
index 36c4e7ac..02077a15 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_termcap.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_termcap.3x.html
@@ -45,15 +45,13 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        PC, UP, BC, ospeed, tgetent, tgetflag, tgetnum, tgetstr,
        tgoto, tputs - direct curses interface to the terminfo
        capability database
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
        #include <term.h>
 
@@ -70,8 +68,7 @@
        int tputs(const char *str, int affcnt, int (*putc)(int));
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        These  routines  are included as a conversion aid for pro-
        grams that use the termcap library.  Their parameters  are
        the  same and the routines are emulated using the terminfo
@@ -80,8 +77,7 @@
        compiled.
 
 
-
-

INITIALIZATION

+

INITIALIZATION

        The tgetent routine loads the entry for name.  It returns:
 
           1  on success,
@@ -107,8 +103,7 @@
               terminal description has cursor-addressing.
 
 
-
-

CAPABILITY VALUES

+

CAPABILITY VALUES

        The tgetflag routine gets the boolean entry for id, or ze-
        ro if it is not available.
 
@@ -139,8 +134,7 @@
        flag, tgetnum and tgetstr are compared in lookups.
 
 
-
-

FORMATTING CAPABILITIES

+

FORMATTING CAPABILITIES

        The  tgoto  routine  instantiates  the parameters into the
        given capability.  The output from this routine is  to  be
        passed to tputs.
@@ -150,8 +144,7 @@
        cap or terminfo name.
 
 
-
-

GLOBAL VARIABLES

+

GLOBAL VARIABLES

        The variables PC, UP and BC are set by tgetent to the ter-
        minfo   entry's   data   for   pad_char,   cursor_up   and
        backspace_if_not_bs,  respectively.   UP  is  not  used by
@@ -161,8 +154,7 @@
        minal speed.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        Except where explicitly noted, routines that return an in-
        teger return ERR upon failure and OK (SVr4 only  specifies
        "an integer value other than ERR") upon successful comple-
@@ -171,8 +163,7 @@
        Routines that return pointers return NULL on error.
 
 
-
-

BUGS

+

BUGS

        If you call tgetstr to fetch ca or any other parameterized
        string,  be aware that it will be returned in terminfo no-
        tation, not the older and not-quite-compatible termcap no-
@@ -197,8 +188,7 @@
        modate termcap's limitation in this respect.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        The  XSI  Curses  standard,  Issue 4 describes these func-
        tions.  However, they are marked TO BE WITHDRAWN  and  may
        be removed in future versions.
@@ -239,8 +229,7 @@
            longer than two characters.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), terminfo(5), term_variables(3x), putc(3).
 
        http://invisible-island.net/ncurses/tctest.html
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_terminfo.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_terminfo.3x.html
index 784b59d1..c72b2f4a 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_terminfo.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_terminfo.3x.html
@@ -50,16 +50,14 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        del_curterm, mvcur, putp, restartterm, set_curterm,
        setterm, setupterm, tigetflag, tigetnum, tigetstr, tiparm,
        tparm, tputs, vid_attr, vid_puts, vidattr, vidputs -
        curses interfaces to terminfo database
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
        #include <term.h>
 
@@ -82,8 +80,7 @@
        char *tiparm(const char *str, ...);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        These low-level routines must be called by  programs  that
        have to deal directly with the terminfo database to handle
        certain terminal capabilities, such as  programming  func-
@@ -91,8 +88,7 @@
        are more suitable and their use is recommended.
 
 
-
-

Initialization

+

Initialization

        Initially, setupterm should  be  called.   Note  that  se-
        tupterm  is  automatically  called by initscr and newterm.
        This  defines  the  set  of  terminal-dependent  variables
@@ -181,8 +177,7 @@
        not recommended for new programs.
 
 
-
-

The Terminal State

+

The Terminal State

        The  setupterm  routine  stores  its information about the
        terminal in a TERMINAL structure pointed to by the  global
        variable  cur_term.   If  it  detects an error, or decides
@@ -219,8 +214,7 @@
        bits.
 
 
-
-

Formatting Output

+

Formatting Output

        The tparm routine instantiates the string str with parame-
        ters  pi.  A pointer is returned to the result of str with
        the parameters applied.
@@ -230,8 +224,7 @@
        ters are integers (int) rather than longs.
 
 
-
-

Output Functions

+

Output Functions

        The tputs  routine  applies  padding  information  to  the
        string  str  and  outputs  it.  The str must be a terminfo
        string variable or the return value from  tparm,  tgetstr,
@@ -266,8 +259,7 @@
        fresh).
 
 
-
-

Terminal Capability Functions

+

Terminal Capability Functions

        The  tigetflag,  tigetnum and tigetstr routines return the
        value of the capability corresponding to the terminfo cap-
        name  passed  to them, such as xenl.  The capname for each
@@ -299,8 +291,7 @@
               scription.
 
 
-
-

Terminal Capability Names

+

Terminal Capability Names

        These null-terminated arrays contain  the  short  terminfo
        names  ("codes"), the termcap names, and the long terminfo
        names ("fnames") for each of the predefined terminfo vari-
@@ -312,8 +303,7 @@
               char *strnames[], *strcodes[], *strfnames[]
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        Routines  that  return  an integer return ERR upon failure
        and OK (SVr4 only specifies "an integer value  other  than
        ERR")  upon  successful completion, unless otherwise noted
@@ -347,8 +337,7 @@
                  the output function putc.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        X/Open notes that vidattr and vidputs may be macros.
 
        The  function  setterm is not described by X/Open and must
@@ -425,8 +414,7 @@
        tic -x, are not stored in the arrays described here.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_initscr(3x), curs_kernel(3x),  curs_term-
        cap(3x),  curs_variables(3x), term_variables(3x), putc(3),
        terminfo(5)
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_threads.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_threads.3x.html
index 2c90da5c..dd19f433 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_threads.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_threads.3x.html
@@ -47,13 +47,11 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        curs_threads - curses thread support
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        typedef int (*NCURSES_WINDOW_CB)(WINDOW *, void *);
@@ -67,8 +65,7 @@
        *data);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        This  implementation can be configured to provide rudimen-
        tary support for multi-threaded applications.  This  makes
        a  different set of libraries, e.g., libncursest since the
@@ -109,8 +106,7 @@
        supplied function to the application.
 
 
-
-

USAGE

+

USAGE

        All of the ncurses library functions assume that  the  lo-
        cale  is  not altered during operation.  In addition, they
        use data which is maintained within a hierarchy of scopes.
@@ -602,26 +598,22 @@
       wvline_set              window
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        These functions all return TRUE or FALSE, except as noted.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Both a macro and a function are provided for each name.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  routines  are  specific  to ncurses.  They were not
        supported on Version 7, BSD or System  V  implementations.
        It  is  recommended that any code depending on ncurses ex-
        tensions be conditioned using NCURSES_VERSION.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_opaque(3x), curs_variables(3x).
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_touch.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_touch.3x.html
index ab3795ab..6a7ee9be 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_touch.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_touch.3x.html
@@ -45,14 +45,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        touchwin, touchline, untouchwin, wtouchln, is_linetouched,
        is_wintouched - curses refresh control routines
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
        int touchwin(WINDOW *win);
        int touchline(WINDOW *win, int start, int count);
@@ -62,8 +60,7 @@
        bool is_wintouched(WINDOW *win);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The touchwin and touchline routines throw away  all  opti-
        mization  information about which parts of the window have
        been touched, by pretending that  the  entire  window  has
@@ -88,8 +85,7 @@
        the given window.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        All  routines  return  the integer ERR upon failure and an
        integer value other than ERR upon  successful  completion,
        unless  otherwise  noted in the preceding routine descrip-
@@ -111,8 +107,7 @@
                    window.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        The  XSI  Curses  standard,  Issue 4 describes these func-
        tions.
 
@@ -122,13 +117,11 @@
        scr).  This will not work under ncurses.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Note that all routines except wtouchln may be macros.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_refresh(3x), curs_variables(3x).
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_trace.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_trace.3x.html
index e4d1129c..ab4eaef9 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_trace.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_trace.3x.html
@@ -45,16 +45,14 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        _tracef, _tracedump, _traceattr, _traceattr2,
        _nc_tracebits, _tracecchar_t, _tracecchar_t2, _tracechar,
        _tracechtype, _tracechtype2, _tracemouse, trace - curses
        debugging routines
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        void _tracef(const char *format, ...);
@@ -71,8 +69,7 @@
        void trace(const unsigned int param);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The trace routines are used for debugging the ncurses  li-
        braries, as well as applications which use the ncurses li-
        braries.  These functions are normally available only with
@@ -168,22 +165,19 @@
               tent, use_env, use_extended_names, use_tioctl
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        Routines which return a value are designed to be  used  as
        parameters to the _tracef routine.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  functions  are not part of the XSI interface.  Some
        other curses implementations are known  to  have  similar,
        undocumented  features,  but  they are not compatible with
        ncurses.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x).
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_util.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_util.3x.html
index 00b13c25..898bd9a4 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_util.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_util.3x.html
@@ -46,15 +46,13 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        delay_output, filter, flushinp, getwin, key_name, keyname,
        nofilter, putwin, unctrl, use_env, use_tioctl, wunctrl -
        miscellaneous curses utility routines
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        char *unctrl(chtype c);
@@ -71,11 +69,9 @@
        int flushinp(void);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

 
-
-

unctrl

+

unctrl

        The  unctrl  routine returns a character string which is a
        printable representation of the character c, ignoring  at-
        tributes.   Control characters are displayed in the ^X no-
@@ -84,8 +80,7 @@
        of a wide character.
 
 
-
-

keyname/key_name

+

keyname/key_name

        The keyname routine returns a character string correspond-
        ing to the key c:
 
@@ -118,8 +113,7 @@
        ter.
 
 
-
-

filter/nofilter

+

filter/nofilter

        The filter routine, if used, must be called before initscr
        or newterm are called.  The effect is that,  during  those
        calls,  LINES  is  set  to 1; the capabilities clear, cup,
@@ -133,8 +127,7 @@
        modifies the in-memory copy of the terminal information.
 
 
-
-

use_env

+

use_env

        The  use_env  routine,  if  used,  should be called before
        initscr or newterm are called (because those  compute  the
        screen size).  It modifies the way ncurses treats environ-
@@ -162,8 +155,7 @@
            environment variables,
 
 
-
-

use_tioctl

+

use_tioctl

        The  use_tioctl  routine, if used, should be called before
        initscr or newterm are called (because those  compute  the
        screen  size).  After use_tioctl is called with TRUE as an
@@ -202,8 +194,7 @@
                             to determine size.
 
 
-
-

putwin/getwin

+

putwin/getwin

        The putwin routine writes all data associated with  window
        (or  pad)  win  into the file to which filep points.  This
        information can be later retrieved using the getwin  func-
@@ -230,8 +221,7 @@
            will not be colored when the window is refreshed.
 
 
-
-

delay_output

+

delay_output

        The  delay_output  routine inserts an ms millisecond pause
        in output.  This routine should not  be  used  extensively
        because  padding  characters  are  used  rather than a CPU
@@ -239,15 +229,13 @@
        napms to perform the delay.
 
 
-
-

flushinp

+

flushinp

        The  flushinp  routine  throws away any typeahead that has
        been typed by the user and has not yet been  read  by  the
        program.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        Except  for  flushinp, routines that return an integer re-
        turn ERR upon failure and OK (SVr4 specifies only "an  in-
        teger value other than ERR") upon successful completion.
@@ -269,19 +257,16 @@
                return an error.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

 
-
-

filter

+

filter

        The SVr4 documentation describes the action of filter only
        in the vaguest terms.  The  description  here  is  adapted
        from  the  XSI Curses standard (which erroneously fails to
        describe the disabling of cuu).
 
 
-
-

keyname

+

keyname

        The keyname function may return the names of  user-defined
        string  capabilities which are defined in the terminfo en-
        try via the -x option of tic.  This  implementation  auto-
@@ -295,8 +280,7 @@
        brary.
 
 
-
-

nofilter/use_tioctl

+

nofilter/use_tioctl

        The nofilter  and  use_tioctl  routines  are  specific  to
        ncurses.   They  were  not  supported on Version 7, BSD or
        System V implementations.  It is recommended that any code
@@ -304,8 +288,7 @@
        NCURSES_VERSION.
 
 
-
-

putwin/getwin

+

putwin/getwin

        The putwin and getwin functions have several  issues  with
        portability:
 
@@ -339,8 +322,7 @@
            may not be successful.
 
 
-
-

unctrl/wunctrl

+

unctrl/wunctrl

        The XSI Curses standard, Issue  4  describes  these  func-
        tions.   It  states  that unctrl and wunctrl will return a
        null pointer if unsuccessful, but does not define any  er-
@@ -387,8 +369,7 @@
        "M-^A", etc.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        legacy_coding(3x), curses(3x), curs_initscr(3x), curs_ker-
        nel(3x),  curs_scr_dump(3x),   curs_variables(3x),   lega-
        cy_coding(3x).
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_variables.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_variables.3x.html
index 596d0954..42ce0b28 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_variables.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_variables.3x.html
@@ -45,14 +45,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        COLORS, COLOR_PAIRS, COLS, ESCDELAY, LINES, TABSIZE,
        curscr, newscr, stdscr - curses global variables
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int COLOR_PAIRS;
@@ -66,8 +64,7 @@
        WINDOW * stdscr;
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        This page summarizes variables provided by the curses  li-
        brary.   A more complete description is given in the curs-
        es(3x) manual page.
@@ -79,8 +76,7 @@
        them as read-only to avoid confusing the library.
 
 
-
-

COLOR_PAIRS

+

COLOR_PAIRS

        After initializing curses, this variable contains the num-
        ber of color pairs which the terminal can support.  Usual-
        ly the number of color pairs  will  be  the  product  COL-
@@ -94,20 +90,17 @@
            sented in a signed short value.
 
 
-
-

COLORS

+

COLORS

        After initializing curses, this variable contains the num-
        ber of colors which the terminal can support.
 
 
-
-

COLS

+

COLS

        After  initializing  curses,  this  variable  contains the
        width of the screen, i.e., the number of columns.
 
 
-
-

ESCDELAY

+

ESCDELAY

        This variable holds the number of milliseconds to wait af-
        ter reading an escape character, to distinguish between an
        individual escape character entered on the  keyboard  from
@@ -115,41 +108,35 @@
        curses(3x).
 
 
-
-

LINES

+

LINES

        After initializing  curses,  this  variable  contains  the
        height of the screen, i.e., the number of lines.
 
 
-
-

TABSIZE

+

TABSIZE

        This  variable  holds  the  number  of columns used by the
        curses library when converting a tab character  to  spaces
        as it adds the tab to a window (see curs_addch(3x).
 
 
-
-

The Current Screen

+

The Current Screen

        This implementation of curses uses a special window curscr
        to record its updates to the terminal screen.
 
 
-
-

The New Screen

+

The New Screen

        This implementation of curses uses a special window newscr
        to  hold  updates  to  the terminal screen before applying
        them to curscr.
 
 
-
-

The Standard Screen

+

The Standard Screen

        Upon initializing curses, a default window called  stdscr,
        which  is  the  size  of  the terminal screen, is created.
        Many curses functions use this window.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The   curses   library   is   initialized   using   either
        curs_initscr(3x), or curs_initscr(3x).
 
@@ -158,8 +145,7 @@
        library.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        ESCDELAY  and TABSIZE are extensions, not provided in most
        other implementations of curses.
 
@@ -179,8 +165,7 @@
        ed to override the value, or rely upon its default value.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x),       curs_opaque(3x),      curs_terminfo(3x),
        curs_threads(3x), term_variables(3x), terminfo(5).
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_window.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_window.3x.html
index c474f1c7..7b7efddb 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_window.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_window.3x.html
@@ -45,15 +45,13 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        newwin, delwin, mvwin, subwin, derwin, mvderwin, dupwin,
        wsyncup, syncok, wcursyncup, wsyncdown - create curses
        windows
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        WINDOW *newwin(
@@ -75,11 +73,9 @@
        void wsyncdown(WINDOW *win);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

 
-
-

newwin

+

newwin

        Calling newwin creates and returns a pointer to a new win-
        dow with the given number of lines and columns.  The upper
        left-hand corner of the window is at
@@ -94,16 +90,14 @@
        newwin(0,0,0,0).
 
 
-
-

delwin

+

delwin

        Calling delwin deletes the named window, freeing all memo-
        ry associated with it (it does not actually erase the win-
        dow's screen image).  Subwindows must  be  deleted  before
        the main window can be deleted.
 
 
-
-

mvwin

+

mvwin

        Calling mvwin moves the window so that the upper left-hand
        corner is at position (x, y).  If the move would cause the
        window to be off the screen, it is an error and the window
@@ -111,8 +105,7 @@
        avoided.
 
 
-
-

subwin

+

subwin

        Calling subwin creates and returns a pointer to a new win-
        dow with the given number of lines, nlines,  and  columns,
        ncols.   The  window  is at position (begin_y, begin_x) on
@@ -123,8 +116,7 @@
        the subwindow.
 
 
-
-

derwin

+

derwin

        Calling derwin is the same as calling subwin, except  that
        begin_y and begin_x are relative to the origin of the win-
        dow orig rather than the screen.  There is  no  difference
@@ -137,37 +129,32 @@
        physical position on the screen.
 
 
-
-

dupwin

+

dupwin

        Calling  dupwin  creates  an exact duplicate of the window
        win.
 
 
-
-

wsyncup

+

wsyncup

        Calling wsyncup touches all locations in ancestors of  win
        that  are changed in win.  If syncok is called with second
        argument TRUE then wsyncup is called automatically whenev-
        er there is a change in the window.
 
 
-
-

wsyncdown

+

wsyncdown

        The  wsyncdown  routine  touches each location in win that
        has been touched in any of  its  ancestor  windows.   This
        routine  is  called by wrefresh, so it should almost never
        be necessary to call it manually.
 
 
-
-

wcursyncup

+

wcursyncup

        The routine wcursyncup updates the current cursor position
        of  all the ancestors of the window to reflect the current
        cursor position of the window.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        Routines that return an integer return the integer ERR up-
        on  failure  and OK (SVr4 only specifies "an integer value
        other than ERR") upon successful completion.
@@ -223,16 +210,14 @@
        been initialized, i.e., with initscr or newterm.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        If many small changes are made to the window, the  wsyncup
        option could degrade performance.
 
        Note that syncok may be a macro.
 
 
-
-

BUGS

+

BUGS

        The  subwindow  functions (subwin, derwin, mvderwin, wsyn-
        cup, wsyncdown, wcursyncup, syncok) are flaky, incomplete-
        ly implemented, and not well tested.
@@ -246,14 +231,12 @@
        may result in slower updates.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        The  XSI  Curses  standard,  Issue 4 describes these func-
        tions.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_refresh(3x),  curs_touch(3x),  curs_vari-
        ables(3x)
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/default_colors.3x.html b/doc/html/man/default_colors.3x.html
index 46e1fdfb..446d4286 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/default_colors.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/default_colors.3x.html
@@ -46,22 +46,19 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        use_default_colors, assume_default_colors - use terminal's
        default colors
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int use_default_colors(void);
        int assume_default_colors(int fg, int bg);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The use_default_colors() and assume_default_colors() func-
        tions are extensions to the curses library.  They are used
        with terminals that support ISO 6429 color, or equivalent.
@@ -110,8 +107,7 @@
        black background for color pair 0.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        These functions return the integer ERR upon failure and OK
        on success.  They will fail if either  the  terminal  does
        not  support  the orig_pair or orig_colors capability.  If
@@ -119,8 +115,7 @@
        an error as well.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        Associated  with  this  extension,  the init_pair function
        accepts negative arguments to specify  default  foreground
        or background colors.
@@ -149,21 +144,18 @@
        setting specific values.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These routines are specific to  ncurses.   They  were  not
        supported  on  Version 7, BSD or System V implementations.
        It is recommended that any code depending on them be  con-
        ditioned using NCURSES_VERSION.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curs_color(3x), ded(1).
 
 
-
-

AUTHOR

+

AUTHOR

        Thomas  Dickey  (from  an analysis of the requirements for
        color xterm for XFree86 3.1.2C, February 1996).
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/define_key.3x.html b/doc/html/man/define_key.3x.html
index e12d9899..df5fd13f 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/define_key.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/define_key.3x.html
@@ -46,20 +46,17 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        define_key - define a keycode
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int define_key(const char *definition, int keycode);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        This is an extension to the curses library.  It permits an
        application to define keycodes  with  their  corresponding
        control  strings,  so that the ncurses library will inter-
@@ -72,8 +69,7 @@
        definition is removed.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        The keycode must be greater than zero, and the string non-
        null, otherwise ERR is returned.  ERR may also be returned
        if there is insufficient memory to allocate  the  data  to
@@ -81,21 +77,18 @@
        returned.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These routines are specific to  ncurses.   They  were  not
        supported  on  Version 7, BSD or System V implementations.
        It is recommended that any code depending on them be  con-
        ditioned using NCURSES_VERSION.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        keyok(3x), key_defined(3x).
 
 
-
-

AUTHOR

+

AUTHOR

        Thomas Dickey.
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/form.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form.3x.html
index 4bb07d02..81d04f8c 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form.3x.html
@@ -46,18 +46,15 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        form - curses extension for programming forms
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <form.h>
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The  form library provides terminal-independent facilities
        for composing form screens  on  character-cell  terminals.
        The  library  includes:  field  routines, which create and
@@ -78,8 +75,7 @@
        called before using any of these functions.
 
 
-
-

Current Default Values for Field Attributes

+

Current Default Values for Field Attributes

        The form library  maintains  a  default  value  for  field
        attributes.   You  can  get or set this default by calling
        the appropriate set_ or  retrieval  routine  with  a  NULL
@@ -88,8 +84,7 @@
        rendering of fields already created.
 
 
-
-

Routine Name Index

+

Routine Name Index

        The  following  table lists each form routine and the name
        of the manual page on which it is described.
 
@@ -172,8 +167,7 @@
        unpost_form            form_post(3x)
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        Routines that return pointers return NULL  on  error,  and
        set  errno  to  the  corresponding  error-code returned by
        functions returning an integer.  Routines that  return  an
@@ -217,8 +211,7 @@
             The form driver code saw an unknown request code.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <form.h> automatically includes the header
        files <curses.h> and <eti.h>.
 
@@ -228,24 +221,21 @@
        using most linkers).
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  routines  emulate the System V forms library.  They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen Pfeifer.  Manual pages and adaptation for  ncurses
        by Eric S. Raymond.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x) and related pages whose names begin "form_" for
        detailed descriptions of the entry points.
 
-       This describes ncurses version 6.0 (patch 20151205).
+       This describes ncurses version 6.0 (patch 20160130).
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_cursor.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_cursor.3x.html
index 392503d0..7d1795cb 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_cursor.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_cursor.3x.html
@@ -46,19 +46,16 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        pos_form_cursor - position a form window cursor
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <form.h>
        int pos_form_cursor(FORM *form);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The  function  pos_form_cursor  restores the cursor to the
        position required for the forms driver  to  continue  pro-
        cessing  requests.   This  is useful after curses routines
@@ -66,8 +63,7 @@
        form operation.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        This routine returns one of the following:
 
        E_OK The routine succeeded.
@@ -83,25 +79,21 @@
             System error occurred (see errno).
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), form(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <form.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  routines  emulate the System V forms library.  They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen Pfeifer.  Manual  pages  and  adaptation  for  new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_data.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_data.3x.html
index ead02924..8e248e55 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_data.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_data.3x.html
@@ -46,21 +46,18 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        data_ahead,  data_behind  -  test  for  off-screen data in
        given forms
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <form.h>
        bool data_ahead(const FORM *form);
        bool data_behind(const FORM *form);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The function data_ahead tests whether there is  off-screen
        data  ahead  in  the  given  form.  It returns TRUE (1) or
        FALSE (0).
@@ -70,25 +67,21 @@
        FALSE (0).
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), form(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <form.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  routines  emulate the System V forms library.  They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen Pfeifer.  Manual  pages  and  adaptation  for  new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_driver.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_driver.3x.html
index 26fcc948..a029ea21 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_driver.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_driver.3x.html
@@ -45,24 +45,20 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        form_driver,  form_driver_w  -  command-processing loop of
        the form system
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <form.h>
        int form_driver(FORM *form, int c);
        int form_driver_w(FORM *form, int c, wchar_t wch);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

 
-
-

form_driver

+

form_driver

        Once a form has been posted (displayed), you should funnel
        input  events to it through form_driver.  This routine has
        three major input cases:
@@ -80,8 +76,7 @@
            an mouse event.
 
 
-
-

form_driver_w

+

form_driver_w

        This extension simplifies the use  of  the  forms  library
        using  wide characters.  The input is either a key code (a
        request) or a wide character returned by get_wch(3x).  The
@@ -90,8 +85,7 @@
        request.
 
 
-
-

Form-driver requests

+

Form-driver requests

        The form driver requests are as follows:
 
        Name               Description
@@ -162,8 +156,7 @@
        that request is executed.
 
 
-
-

Mouse handling

+

Mouse handling

        If the second argument is the KEY_MOUSE special  key,  the
        associated mouse event is translated into one of the above
        pre-defined requests.  Currently only clicks in  the  user
@@ -207,8 +200,7 @@
        E_REQUEST_DENIED is returned.
 
 
-
-

Application-defined commands

+

Application-defined commands

        If the second argument is neither printable nor one of the
        above  pre-defined form requests, the driver assumes it is
        an application-specific command and returns E_UNKNOWN_COM-
@@ -217,8 +209,7 @@
        defined requests.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        form_driver returns one of the following error codes:
 
        E_OK The routine succeeded.
@@ -247,25 +238,21 @@
             The form driver code saw an unknown request code.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), form(3x), form_variables(3x), curs_getch(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <form.h> automatically includes the header
        files <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These routines emulate the System V forms  library.   They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen  Pfeifer.   Manual  pages  and  adaptation for new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_field.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_field.3x.html
index f40cf747..2754a790 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_field.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_field.3x.html
@@ -46,14 +46,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        form_field - make and break connections between fields and
        forms
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <form.h>
        int set_form_fields(FORM *form, FIELD **fields);
        FIELD **form_fields(const FORM *form);
@@ -61,8 +59,7 @@
        int move_field(FIELD *field, int frow, int fcol);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The function set_form_fields  changes  the  field  pointer
        array  of the given form.  The array must be terminated by
        a NULL.
@@ -77,8 +74,7 @@
        be disconnected) to a specified location on the screen.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        The  function  form_fields returns a pointer (which may be
        NULL).  It does not set errno.
 
@@ -104,19 +100,16 @@
             System error occurred (see errno).
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), form(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <form.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These routines emulate the System V forms  library.   They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
@@ -124,8 +117,7 @@
        field_count error value as -1 (which is the value of ERR).
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen Pfeifer.  Manual  pages  and  adaptation  for  new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_field_attributes.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_field_attributes.3x.html
index d7789f7f..58c677f6 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_field_attributes.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_field_attributes.3x.html
@@ -46,14 +46,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        form_field_attributes  -  color  and attribute control for
        form fields
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <form.h>
        int set_field_fore(FIELD *field, chtype attr);
        chtype field_fore(const FIELD *field);
@@ -63,8 +61,7 @@
        int field_pad(const FIELD *field);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The function set_field_fore sets the foreground  attribute
        of  field. This is the highlight used to display the field
        contents.  The function field_fore returns the  foreground
@@ -80,8 +77,7 @@
        form's pad character.  The default is a blank.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        These routines return one of the following:
 
        E_OK The routine succeeded.
@@ -94,26 +90,22 @@
             System error occurred (see errno).
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x) and related pages whose names begin "form_" for
        detailed descriptions of the entry points.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <form.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  routines  emulate the System V forms library.  They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen Pfeifer.  Manual  pages  and  adaptation  for  new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_field_buffer.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_field_buffer.3x.html
index c58fd21c..329a8db4 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_field_buffer.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_field_buffer.3x.html
@@ -46,13 +46,11 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        form_field_buffer - field buffer control
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <form.h>
 
        int  set_field_buffer(FIELD  *field,  int  buf, const char
@@ -63,8 +61,7 @@
        int set_max_field(FIELD *field, int max);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The function set_field_buffer sets the numbered buffer  of
        the given field to contain a given string:
 
@@ -112,8 +109,7 @@
        size threshold for that field.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        The field_buffer function returns NULL on error.  It  sets
        errno according to their success:
 
@@ -137,14 +133,12 @@
             ment.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x) and related pages whose names begin "form_" for
        detailed descriptions of the entry points.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <form.h> automatically includes the header
        file
 
@@ -155,14 +149,12 @@
        fer to return the same buffer.  <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  routines  emulate the System V forms library.  They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen Pfeifer.  Manual  pages  and  adaptation  for  new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_field_info.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_field_info.3x.html
index 9023d87f..9f22bd03 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_field_info.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_field_info.3x.html
@@ -46,14 +46,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        dynamic_field_info, field_info - retrieve field character-
        istics
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <form.h>
        int field_info(const FIELD *field, int *rows, int *cols,
                      int *frow, int *fcol, int *nrow, int *nbuf);
@@ -61,8 +59,7 @@
        *cols, int *max);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The  function  field_info  returns  the  sizes  and  other
        attributes passed in to the field at  its  creation  time.
        The  attributes are: height, width, row of upper-left cor-
@@ -76,8 +73,7 @@
        turning off the O_STATIC option with field_opts_off.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        These routines return one of the following:
 
        E_OK The routine succeeded.
@@ -90,20 +86,17 @@
             ment.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x) and related pages whose names begin "form_" for
        detailed descriptions of the entry points.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <form.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These routines emulate the System V forms  library.   They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
@@ -112,8 +105,7 @@
        allow this, e.g., Solaris 2.7 does not.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen  Pfeifer.   Manual  pages  and  adaptation for new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_field_just.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_field_just.3x.html
index 8a64bee3..21e8c045 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_field_just.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_field_just.3x.html
@@ -46,29 +46,25 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        set_field_just,  field_just  - retrieve field characteris-
        tics
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <form.h>
        int set_field_just(FIELD *field, int justification);
        int field_just(const FIELD *field);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The  function  set_field_just   sets   the   justification
        attribute  of a field; field_just returns a field's justi-
        fication attribute.  The attribute may be one of NO_JUSTI-
        FICATION, JUSTIFY_RIGHT, JUSTIFY_LEFT, or JUSTIFY_CENTER.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        The  function field_just returns one of: NO_JUSTIFICATION,
        JUSTIFY_RIGHT, JUSTIFY_LEFT, or JUSTIFY_CENTER.
 
@@ -84,26 +80,22 @@
             ment.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x) and related pages whose names begin "form_" for
        detailed descriptions of the entry points.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <form.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  routines  emulate the System V forms library.  They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen Pfeifer.  Manual  pages  and  adaptation  for  new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_field_new.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_field_new.3x.html
index c3633e9a..b266a7e9 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_field_new.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_field_new.3x.html
@@ -46,14 +46,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        new_field,  dup_field, link_field, free_field - create and
        destroy form fields
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <form.h>
        FIELD *new_field(int height, int width,
                         int toprow, int leftcol,
@@ -63,8 +61,7 @@
        int free_field(FIELD *field);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The function new_field allocates a new field and  initial-
        izes  it  from the parameters given: height, width, row of
        upper-left corner, column  of  upper-left  corner,  number
@@ -85,8 +82,7 @@
        with a field.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        The function, new_field, dup_field, link_field return NULL
        on error.  They set errno according to their success:
 
@@ -111,19 +107,16 @@
             field is connected.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), form(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <form.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  routines  emulate the System V forms library.  They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
@@ -133,8 +126,7 @@
        what does not.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen  Pfeifer.   Manual  pages  and  adaptation for new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_field_opts.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_field_opts.3x.html
index dff1b6d3..c9a1205e 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_field_opts.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_field_opts.3x.html
@@ -46,14 +46,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        set_field_opts,  field_opts_on, field_opts_off, field_opts
        - set and get field options
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <form.h>
        int set_field_opts(FIELD *field, Field_Options opts);
        int field_opts_on(FIELD *field, Field_Options opts);
@@ -61,8 +59,7 @@
        Field_Options field_opts(const FIELD *field);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The function set_field_opts sets  all  the  given  field's
        option  bits  (field  option  bits  may be logically-OR'ed
        together).
@@ -128,8 +125,7 @@
             which is normally discarded.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        Except for field_opts, each routine  returns  one  of  the
        following:
 
@@ -146,25 +142,21 @@
             System error occurred (see errno).
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), form(3x).  form_field_just(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <form.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  routines  emulate the System V forms library.  They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen Pfeifer.  Manual  pages  and  adaptation  for  new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_field_userptr.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_field_userptr.3x.html
index edec864d..de534a89 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_field_userptr.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_field_userptr.3x.html
@@ -46,47 +46,40 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        set_field_userptr,  field_userptr  - associate application
        data with a form field
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <form.h>
        int set_field_userptr(FIELD *field, void*userptr);
        void *field_userptr(const FIELD *field);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        Every form field has a field that  can  be  used  to  hold
        application-specific  data  (that is, the form-driver code
        leaves it alone).  These functions get and set that field.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        The function field_userptr returns a pointer (which may be
        NULL).  It does not set errno.
 
        The function set_field_userptr returns E_OK (success).
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), form(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <form.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These routines emulate the System V forms  library.   They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
@@ -94,8 +87,7 @@
        it as a char pointer for SVr4 compatibility.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen Pfeifer.  Manual  pages  and  adaptation  for  new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_field_validation.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_field_validation.3x.html
index 677790e3..ce9b36f0 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_field_validation.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_field_validation.3x.html
@@ -45,13 +45,11 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        form_field_validation - data type validation for fields
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <form.h>
        int set_field_type(FIELD *field, FIELDTYPE *type, ...);
        FIELDTYPE *field_type(const FIELD *field);
@@ -66,8 +64,7 @@
        FIELDTYPE *TYPE_IPV4;
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The  function  set_field_type  declares  a data type for a
        given form field.  This is the type checked by  validation
        functions.  The predefined types are as follows:
@@ -148,8 +145,7 @@
        types.  See the form_fieldtype(3x) manual page.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        The  functions  field_type  and  field_arg  return NULL on
        error. The function set_field_type returns one of the fol-
        lowing:
@@ -160,25 +156,21 @@
             System error occurred (see errno).
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), form(3x), form_variables(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <form.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These routines emulate the System V forms  library.   They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen  Pfeifer.   Manual  pages  and  adaptation for new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_fieldtype.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_fieldtype.3x.html
index b1e27a6d..21ca1ed2 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_fieldtype.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_fieldtype.3x.html
@@ -46,13 +46,11 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        form_fieldtype - define validation-field types
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <form.h>
        FIELDTYPE *new_fieldtype(
            bool (* const field_check)(FIELD *, const void *),
@@ -71,8 +69,7 @@
                                  FIELDTYPE *type2);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The function new_fieldtype creates a new field type usable
        for data validation.  You supply it  with  field_check,  a
        predicate  to check the validity of an entered data string
@@ -118,8 +115,7 @@
        arguments.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        The  pointer-valued  routines  return NULL on error.  They
        set errno according to their success:
 
@@ -151,13 +147,11 @@
             System error occurred (see errno).
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), form(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <form.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
@@ -166,14 +160,12 @@
        for strict compatibility with System V.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These routines emulate the System V forms  library.   They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen  Pfeifer.   Manual  pages  and  adaptation for new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_hook.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_hook.3x.html
index 4f3c54f5..3855ecca 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_hook.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_hook.3x.html
@@ -46,14 +46,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        form_hook - set hooks for automatic invocation by applica-
        tions
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <form.h>
        int set_field_init(FORM *form, Form_Hook func);
        Form_Hook field_init(const FORM *form);
@@ -65,8 +63,7 @@
        Form_Hook form_term(const FORM *form);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        These functions make it possible to set hook functions  to
        be called at various points in the automatic processing of
        input event codes by form_driver.
@@ -92,8 +89,7 @@
        any (NULL if there is no such hook).
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        Routines that return pointers return NULL on error.  Other
        routines return one of the following:
 
@@ -103,25 +99,21 @@
             System error occurred (see errno).
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), form(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <form.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These routines emulate the System V forms  library.   They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen  Pfeifer.   Manual  pages  and  adaptation for new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_new.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_new.3x.html
index 50a5e117..c4832155 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_new.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_new.3x.html
@@ -46,20 +46,17 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        new_form, free_form - create and destroy forms
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <form.h>
        FORM *new_form(FIELD **fields);
        int free_form(FORM *form);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The  function  new_form  creates a new form connected to a
        specified field pointer array (which must  be  NULL-termi-
        nated).
@@ -68,8 +65,7 @@
        array and frees the storage allocated for the form.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        The function new_form returns  NULL  on  error.   It  sets
        errno according to the function's success:
 
@@ -97,25 +93,21 @@
             The form has already been posted.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), form(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <form.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These routines emulate the System V forms  library.   They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen  Pfeifer.   Manual  pages  and  adaptation for new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_new_page.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_new_page.3x.html
index 84d14997..79c2a760 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_new_page.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_new_page.3x.html
@@ -46,20 +46,17 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        set_new_page, new_page - form pagination functions
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <form.h>
        int set_new_page(FIELD *field, bool new_page_flag);
        bool new_page(const FIELD *field);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The  function  set_new_page  sets or resets a flag marking
        the given field as the beginning of  a  new  page  on  its
        form.
@@ -68,8 +65,7 @@
        given field marks a page beginning on its form.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        The function new_page returns TRUE or FALSE.
 
        The function set_new_page return one of the following:
@@ -83,26 +79,22 @@
             The given field is already connected to a form.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x) and related pages whose names begin "form_" for
        detailed descriptions of the entry points.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <form.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These routines emulate the System V forms  library.   They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen  Pfeifer.   Manual  pages  and  adaptation for new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_opts.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_opts.3x.html
index 810243a0..4c68bed2 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_opts.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_opts.3x.html
@@ -46,14 +46,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        set_form_opts,  form_opts_on,  form_opts_off,  form_opts -
        set and get form options
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <form.h>
        int set_form_opts(FORM *form, Field_Options opts);
        int form_opts_on(FORM *form, Field_Options opts);
@@ -61,8 +59,7 @@
        Field_Options form_opts(const FORM *form);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The function  set_form_opts  sets  all  the  given  form's
        option  bits  (form  option  bits  may  be logically-OR'ed
        together).
@@ -89,8 +86,7 @@
             the previous field.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        Except for form_opts, each routine returns one of the fol-
        lowing:
 
@@ -100,25 +96,21 @@
             System error occurred (see errno).
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), form(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <form.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  routines  emulate the System V forms library.  They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen Pfeifer.  Manual  pages  and  adaptation  for  new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_page.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_page.3x.html
index 8b12bb4c..dafa3f02 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_page.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_page.3x.html
@@ -46,13 +46,11 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        form_page - set and get form page number
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <form.h>
        int set_current_field(FORM *form, FIELD *field);
        FIELD *current_field(const FORM *);
@@ -61,8 +59,7 @@
        int field_index(const FIELD *field);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The  function  set_current field sets the current field of
        the given form; current_field returns the current field of
        the given form.
@@ -79,8 +76,7 @@
        not connected.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        Except for form_page, each routine returns one of the fol-
        lowing:
 
@@ -104,25 +100,21 @@
             System error occurred (see errno).
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), form(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <form.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These routines emulate the System V forms  library.   They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen  Pfeifer.   Manual  pages  and  adaptation for new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_post.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_post.3x.html
index 4a103da2..a16f9485 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_post.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_post.3x.html
@@ -46,21 +46,18 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        post_form, unpost_form - write or erase forms from associ-
        ated subwindows
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <form.h>
        int post_form(FORM *form);
        int unpost_form(FORM *form);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The function post_form displays a form to  its  associated
        subwindow.   To trigger physical display of the subwindow,
        use  refresh  or  some  equivalent  curses  routine   (the
@@ -71,8 +68,7 @@
        subwindow.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        These routines return one of the following:
 
        E_OK The routine succeeded.
@@ -101,25 +97,21 @@
             System error occurred (see errno).
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), form(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <form.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These routines emulate the System V forms  library.   They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen  Pfeifer.   Manual  pages  and  adaptation for new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_requestname.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_requestname.3x.html
index 5f8e66b8..38107e96 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_requestname.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_requestname.3x.html
@@ -46,21 +46,18 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        form_request_by_name, form_request_name - handle printable
        form request names
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <form.h>
        const char *form_request_name(int request);
        int form_request_by_name(const char *name);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The function form_request_name returns the printable  name
        of a form request code.
        The function form_request_by_name searches in the name-ta-
@@ -68,35 +65,30 @@
        request code. Otherwise E_NO_MATCH is returned.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        form_request_name  returns NULL on error and sets errno to
        E_BAD_ARGUMENT.
        form_request_by_name returns E_NO_MATCH on error.  It does
        not set errno.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), form(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <form.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These routines are specific to  ncurses.   They  were  not
        supported  on  Version 7, BSD or System V implementations.
        It is recommended that any code depending on them be  con-
        ditioned using NCURSES_VERSION.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen  Pfeifer.   Manual  pages  and  adaptation for new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_userptr.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_userptr.3x.html
index deba2ffe..45860873 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_userptr.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_userptr.3x.html
@@ -46,48 +46,41 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        set_form_userptr,  form_userptr  -  associate  application
        data with a form item
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <form.h>
        int set_form_userptr(FORM *form, void *userptr);
        void* form_userptr(const FORM *form);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        Every form and every form item has a  field  that  can  be
        used to hold application-specific data (that is, the form-
        driver code leaves it alone).  These functions get and set
        the form user pointer field.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        The  function form_userptr returns a pointer (which may be
        NULL).  It does not set errno.
 
        The function set_form_userptr returns E_OK (success).
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), form(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <form.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  routines  emulate the System V forms library.  They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
@@ -95,8 +88,7 @@
        it as a char pointer for SVr4 compatibility.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen  Pfeifer.   Manual  pages  and  adaptation for new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_variables.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_variables.3x.html
index 0d416164..f1a4590e 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_variables.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_variables.3x.html
@@ -45,15 +45,13 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        TYPE_ALNUM, TYPE_ALPHA, TYPE_ENUM, TYPE_INTEGER,
        TYPE_IPV4, TYPE_NUMERIC, TYPE_REGEXP - form system global
        variables
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <form.h>
 
        FIELDTYPE * TYPE_ALNUM;
@@ -65,58 +63,48 @@
        FIELDTYPE * TYPE_REGEXP;
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        These  are  building blocks for the form library, defining
        fields that can be created using form_fieldtype(3x).   Each
        provides  functions  for  field- and character-validation,
        according to the given datatype.
 
 
-
-

TYPE_ALNUM

+

TYPE_ALNUM

        This holds alphanumeric data.
 
 
-
-

TYPE_ALPHA

+

TYPE_ALPHA

        This holds alphabetic data.
 
 
-
-

TYPE_ENUM

+

TYPE_ENUM

        This holds an enumerated type.
 
 
-
-

TYPE_INTEGER

+

TYPE_INTEGER

        This holds a decimal integer.
 
 
-
-

TYPE_IPV4

+

TYPE_IPV4

        This holds an IPv4 internet address, e.g., "127.0.0.1".
 
 
-
-

TYPE_NUMERIC

+

TYPE_NUMERIC

        This holds a decimal number, with optional sign and  deci-
        mal point.
 
 
-
-

TYPE_REGEXP

+

TYPE_REGEXP

        This holds a regular expression.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        The  TYPE_IPV4  variable  is  an extension not provided by
        older implementations of the form library.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        form(3x).
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_win.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_win.3x.html
index b164c260..4f10b5f1 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_win.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_win.3x.html
@@ -46,14 +46,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        form_win  - make and break form window and subwindow asso-
        ciations
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <form.h>
        int set_form_win(FORM *form, WINDOW *win);
        WINDOW *form_win(const FORM *form);
@@ -62,8 +60,7 @@
        int scale_form(const FORM *form, int *rows, int *columns);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        Every form has an associated pair of curses windows.   The
        form  window displays any title and border associated with
        the window; the form subwindow displays the items  of  the
@@ -82,8 +79,7 @@
        for the subwindow of form.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        Routines  that return pointers return NULL on error.  Rou-
        tines that return an integer return one of  the  following
        error codes:
@@ -104,25 +100,21 @@
             No items are connected to the form.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_variables(3x), form(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <form.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  routines  emulate the System V forms library.  They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen Pfeifer.  Manual  pages  and  adaptation  for  new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/infocmp.1m.html b/doc/html/man/infocmp.1m.html
index a4376c16..e7e4325b 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/infocmp.1m.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/infocmp.1m.html
@@ -46,21 +46,18 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        infocmp - compare or print out terminfo descriptions
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        infocmp [-1CDEFGIKLTUVcdegilnpqrtux]
              [-v n] [-s d| i| l| c] [-Q n] [-R subset]
              [-w width] [-A directory] [-B directory]
              [termname...]
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        infocmp  can  be  used  to compare a binary terminfo entry
        with other terminfo entries, rewrite a  terminfo  descrip-
        tion  to  take  advantage  of  the use= terminfo field, or
@@ -70,15 +67,13 @@
        fields, followed by the string fields.
 
 
-
-

Default Options

+

Default Options

        If  no options are specified and zero or one termnames are
        specified, the -I option will be assumed.   If  more  than
        one termname is specified, the -d option will be assumed.
 
 
-
-

Comparison Options [-d] [-c] [-n]

+

Comparison Options [-d] [-c] [-n]

        infocmp  compares  the  terminfo  description of the first
        terminal termname with each of the descriptions  given  by
        the  entries  for  the  other  terminal's termnames.  If a
@@ -104,8 +99,7 @@
        anything was left out of a description.
 
 
-
-

Source Listing Options [-I] [-L] [-C] [-r]

+

Source Listing Options [-I] [-L] [-C] [-r]

        The  -I,  -L, and -C options will produce a source listing
        for each terminal named.
 
@@ -175,8 +169,7 @@
      %p2 is printed before %p1   %r        hp
 
 
-
-

Use= Option [-u]

+

Use= Option [-u]

        The -u option produces a terminfo  source  description  of
        the  first  terminal termname which is relative to the sum
        of the descriptions given by the  entries  for  the  other
@@ -245,8 +238,7 @@
        ated by different people.
 
 
-
-

Other Options

+

Other Options

        -0   causes the fields to be printed on one line,  without
             wrapping.
 
@@ -457,14 +449,12 @@
             can be loaded using the -x option of tic.
 
 
-
-

FILES

+

FILES

        /usr/share/terminfo Compiled  terminal  description  data-
                            base.
 
 
-
-

EXTENSIONS

+

EXTENSIONS

        The  -0,  -1,  -E, -F, -G, -R, -T, -V, -a, -e, -f, -g, -i,
        -l, -p, -q and  -t  options  are  not  supported  in  SVr4
        curses.
@@ -475,23 +465,20 @@
        -RBSD.
 
 
-
-

BUGS

+

BUGS

        The -F option of infocmp(1m) should be a toe(1m) mode.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        captoinfo(1m),    infotocap(1m),     tic(1m),     toe(1m),
        curses(3x), terminfo(5).
 
        http://invisible-island.net/ncurses/tctest.html
 
-       This describes ncurses version 6.0 (patch 20151205).
+       This describes ncurses version 6.0 (patch 20160130).
 
 
-
-

AUTHOR

+

AUTHOR

        Eric S. Raymond <esr@snark.thyrsus.com> and
        Thomas E. Dickey <dickey@invisible-island.net>
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/infotocap.1m.html b/doc/html/man/infotocap.1m.html
index 0a8163a6..2bdd6fc9 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/infotocap.1m.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/infotocap.1m.html
@@ -46,19 +46,16 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        infotocap  - convert a terminfo description into a termcap
        description
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        infotocap [-vn width]  [-V] [-1] [-w width] file . . .
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        infotocap looks in  each  given  text  file  for  terminfo
        descriptions.   For  each  terminfo  description found, an
        equivalent termcap description is written to standard out-
@@ -78,27 +75,23 @@
        -w   change the output to width characters.
 
 
-
-

FILES

+

FILES

        /usr/share/terminfo Compiled  terminal  description  data-
                            base.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        This  utility  is  actually  a  link to tic, running in -C
        mode.  You can use other tic options such as -f and  -x.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), tic(1m), infocmp(1m), terminfo(5)
 
-       This describes ncurses version 6.0 (patch 20151205).
+       This describes ncurses version 6.0 (patch 20160130).
 
 
-
-

AUTHOR

+

AUTHOR

        Eric S. Raymond <esr@snark.thyrsus.com> and
        Thomas E. Dickey <dickey@invisible-island.net>
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/key_defined.3x.html b/doc/html/man/key_defined.3x.html
index 62d52d18..664c5634 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/key_defined.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/key_defined.3x.html
@@ -46,48 +46,41 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        key_defined - check if a keycode is defined
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int key_defined(const char *definition);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        This is an extension to the curses library.  It permits an
        application to determine if a string is currently bound to
        any keycode.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        If  the  string  is bound to a keycode, its value (greater
        than zero) is returned.  If no keycode is bound,  zero  is
        returned.   If  the  string  conflicts with longer strings
        which are bound to keys, -1 is returned.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These routines are specific to  ncurses.   They  were  not
        supported  on  Version 7, BSD or System V implementations.
        It is recommended that any code depending on them be  con-
        ditioned using NCURSES_VERSION.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        define_key(3x).
 
 
-
-

AUTHOR

+

AUTHOR

        Thomas Dickey.
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/keybound.3x.html b/doc/html/man/keybound.3x.html
index a726f8a1..5e4c022e 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/keybound.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/keybound.3x.html
@@ -46,27 +46,23 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        keybound - return definition of keycode
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        char * keybound(int keycode, int count);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        This is an extension to the curses library.  It permits an
        application to determine the string which  is  defined  in
        the terminfo for specific keycodes.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        The keycode parameter must be greater than zero, else NULL
        is returned.  If it does not correspond to a defined  key,
        then  NULL  is  returned.   The count parameter is used to
@@ -75,21 +71,18 @@
        returns a string which must be freed by the caller.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These routines are specific to  ncurses.   They  were  not
        supported  on  Version 7, BSD or System V implementations.
        It is recommended that any code depending on them be  con-
        ditioned using NCURSES_VERSION.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        define_key(3x), keyok(3x).
 
 
-
-

AUTHOR

+

AUTHOR

        Thomas Dickey.
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/keyok.3x.html b/doc/html/man/keyok.3x.html
index 31cbab8d..4f76638b 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/keyok.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/keyok.3x.html
@@ -46,28 +46,24 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        keyok - enable or disable a keycode
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int keyok(int keycode, bool enable);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        This is an extension to the curses library.  It permits an
        application to disable specific keycodes, rather than  use
        the  keypad  function  to disable all keycodes.  Keys that
        have been disabled can be re-enabled.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        The keycode  must  be  greater  than  zero,  else  ERR  is
        returned.   If  it  does  not correspond to a defined key,
        then ERR is returned.  If the enable  parameter  is  true,
@@ -75,21 +71,18 @@
        Otherwise, the function returns OK.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These routines are specific to  ncurses.   They  were  not
        supported  on  Version 7, BSD or System V implementations.
        It is recommended that any code depending on them be  con-
        ditioned using NCURSES_VERSION.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        define_key(3x).
 
 
-
-

AUTHOR

+

AUTHOR

        Thomas Dickey.
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/legacy_coding.3x.html b/doc/html/man/legacy_coding.3x.html
index d04f729a..c9046dd7 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/legacy_coding.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/legacy_coding.3x.html
@@ -46,20 +46,17 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        use_legacy_coding - use terminal's default colors
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int use_legacy_coding(int level);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The  use_legacy_coding()  function  is an extension to the
        curses library.  It allows the caller to change the result
        of  unctrl, and suppress related checks within the library
@@ -81,28 +78,24 @@
                    is.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        If  the  screen  has  not  been  initialized, or the level
        parameter is out of range, the function returns ERR.  Oth-
        erwise, it returns the previous level: 0, 1 or 2.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        This routine is specific to ncurses.  It was not supported
        on Version 7, BSD or System V implementations.  It is rec-
        ommended  that any code depending on ncurses extensions be
        conditioned using NCURSES_VERSION.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        unctrl.
 
 
-
-

AUTHOR

+

AUTHOR

        Thomas Dickey (to support lynx's font-switching feature).
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/menu.3x.html b/doc/html/man/menu.3x.html
index 16542f4f..0f75fe3a 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/menu.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/menu.3x.html
@@ -46,18 +46,15 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        menu - curses extension for programming menus
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <menu.h>
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The  menu library provides terminal-independent facilities
        for composing menu systems  on  character-cell  terminals.
        The library includes: item routines, which create and mod-
@@ -71,8 +68,7 @@
        library, link with the options -lmenu -lcurses.
 
 
-
-

Current Default Values for Item Attributes

+

Current Default Values for Item Attributes

        The  menu  library  maintains  a  default  value  for item
        attributes.  You can get or set this  default  by  calling
        the  appropriate  get_  or  set_  routine with a NULL item
@@ -81,8 +77,7 @@
        rendering of items already created.
 
 
-
-

Routine Name Index

+

Routine Name Index

        The following table lists each menu routine and  the  name
        of the manual page on which it is described.
 
@@ -155,8 +150,7 @@
        unpost_menu            menu_post(3x)
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        Routines  that return pointers return NULL on error.  Rou-
        tines that return an integer return one of  the  following
        error codes:
@@ -199,8 +193,7 @@
             The menu driver code saw an unknown request code.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <menu.h> automatically includes the header
        files <curses.h> and <eti.h>.
 
@@ -210,24 +203,21 @@
        error).
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  routines  emulate  the System V menu library.  They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen Pfeifer.  Manual pages and adaptation for  ncurses
        by Eric S. Raymond.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x) and related pages whose names begin "menu_" for
        detailed descriptions of the entry points.
 
-       This describes ncurses version 6.0 (patch 20151205).
+       This describes ncurses version 6.0 (patch 20160130).
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/menu_attributes.3x.html b/doc/html/man/menu_attributes.3x.html
index 0293920d..a66efc0e 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/menu_attributes.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/menu_attributes.3x.html
@@ -46,15 +46,13 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        menu_back,  menu_fore, menu_grey, menu_pad, set_menu_back,
        set_menu_fore, set_menu_grey,  set_menu_pad  -  color  and
        attribute control for menus
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <menu.h>
        int set_menu_fore(MENU *menu, chtype attr);
        chtype menu_fore(const MENU *menu);
@@ -66,8 +64,7 @@
        int menu_pad(const MENU *menu);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The  function  set_menu_fore sets the foreground attribute
        of menu. This is the  highlight  used  for  selected  menu
        items.   menu_fore  returns the foreground attribute.  The
@@ -91,8 +88,7 @@
        The default is a blank.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        These routines return one of the following:
 
        E_OK The routine succeeded.
@@ -105,26 +101,22 @@
             ment.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x) and related pages whose names begin "menu_" for
        detailed descriptions of the entry points.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <menu.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These routines emulate the System V  menu  library.   They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen  Pfeifer.   Manual  pages  and  adaptation for new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/menu_cursor.3x.html b/doc/html/man/menu_cursor.3x.html
index fe3128cf..6e2875fc 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/menu_cursor.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/menu_cursor.3x.html
@@ -46,27 +46,23 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        pos_menu_cursor - position a menu's cursor
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <menu.h>
        int pos_menu_cursor(const MENU *menu);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The  function  pos_menu_cursor  restores the cursor to the
        current position associated with the menu's selected item.
        This  is  useful after curses routines have been called to
        do screen-painting in response to a menu select.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        This routine returns one of the following:
 
        E_OK The routine succeeded.
@@ -82,25 +78,21 @@
             The menu has not been posted.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), menu(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <menu.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These routines emulate the System V  menu  library.   They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen  Pfeifer.   Manual  pages  and  adaptation for new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/menu_driver.3x.html b/doc/html/man/menu_driver.3x.html
index 7de5eba3..495b763b 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/menu_driver.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/menu_driver.3x.html
@@ -45,19 +45,16 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        menu_driver - command-processing loop of the menu system
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <menu.h>
        int menu_driver(MENU *menu, int c);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        Once a menu has been posted (displayed), you should funnel
        input events to it through menu_driver.  This routine  has
        three major input cases:
@@ -138,8 +135,7 @@
        requests, the corresponding action is performed.
 
 
-
-

MOUSE HANDLING

+

MOUSE HANDLING

        If  the  second argument is the KEY_MOUSE special key, the
        associated mouse event is translated into one of the above
        pre-defined  requests.   Currently only clicks in the user
@@ -183,8 +179,7 @@
        E_REQUEST_DENIED is returned.
 
 
-
-

APPLICATION-DEFINED COMMANDS

+

APPLICATION-DEFINED COMMANDS

        If the second argument is neither printable nor one of the
        above pre-defined menu requests or  KEY_MOUSE,  the  drive
        assumes  it is an application-specific command and returns
@@ -193,8 +188,7 @@
        these pre-defined requests.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        menu_driver return one of the following error codes:
 
        E_OK The routine succeeded.
@@ -223,26 +217,22 @@
             The menu driver could not process the request.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), menu(3x), curs_getch(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <menu.h> automatically includes the header
        files <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  routines  emulate  the System V menu library.  They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions. The  sup-
        port for mouse events is ncurses specific.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen  Pfeifer.   Manual  pages  and  adaptation for new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/menu_format.3x.html b/doc/html/man/menu_format.3x.html
index 09353f00..35a8a5d7 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/menu_format.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/menu_format.3x.html
@@ -46,20 +46,17 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        set_menu_format, menu_format - set and get menu sizes
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <menu.h>
        int set_menu_format(MENU *menu, int rows, int cols);
        void menu_format(const MENU *menu, int *rows, int *cols);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The function set_menu_format sets the maximum display size
        of the given menu.  If this size is too small  to  display
        all  menu items, the menu will be made scrollable. If this
@@ -78,8 +75,7 @@
        rows and cols.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        These routines returns one of the following:
 
        E_OK The routine succeeded.
@@ -98,25 +94,21 @@
             No items are connected to the menu.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), menu(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <menu.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These routines emulate the System V  menu  library.   They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen  Pfeifer.   Manual  pages  and  adaptation for new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/menu_hook.3x.html b/doc/html/man/menu_hook.3x.html
index 00148f7d..941c410c 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/menu_hook.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/menu_hook.3x.html
@@ -46,14 +46,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        menu_hook - set hooks for automatic invocation by applica-
        tions
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <menu.h>
        int set_item_init(MENU *menu, Menu_Hook func);
        Menu_Hook item_init(const MENU *menu);
@@ -65,8 +63,7 @@
        Menu_Hook menu_term(const MENU *menu);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        These functions make it possible to set hook functions  to
        be called at various points in the automatic processing of
        input event codes by menu_driver.
@@ -92,8 +89,7 @@
        menu term hook, if any (NULL if there is no such hook).
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        Routines that return pointers return NULL on error.  Other
        routines return one of the following:
 
@@ -103,25 +99,21 @@
             System error occurred (see errno).
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), menu(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <menu.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These routines emulate the System V  menu  library.   They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen  Pfeifer.   Manual  pages  and  adaptation for new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/menu_items.3x.html b/doc/html/man/menu_items.3x.html
index 4fb7c2b2..b6344221 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/menu_items.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/menu_items.3x.html
@@ -46,22 +46,19 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        set_menu_items,  menu_items,  item_count  - make and break
        connections between items and menus
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <menu.h>
        int set_menu_items(MENU *menu, ITEM **items);
        ITEM **menu_items(const MENU *menu);
        int item_count(const MENU *menu);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The function set_menu_items changes the item pointer array
        of  the  given  menu.   The  array must be terminated by a
        NULL.
@@ -73,8 +70,7 @@
        menu.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        The function menu_items returns a pointer  (which  may  be
        NULL).  It does not set errno.
 
@@ -100,19 +96,16 @@
             System error occurred (see errno).
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), menu(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <menu.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  routines  emulate  the System V menu library.  They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
@@ -120,8 +113,7 @@
        item_count error value as -1 (which is the value of ERR).
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen  Pfeifer.   Manual  pages  and  adaptation for new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/menu_mark.3x.html b/doc/html/man/menu_mark.3x.html
index bb578461..48c0d680 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/menu_mark.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/menu_mark.3x.html
@@ -46,21 +46,18 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        set_menu_mark,  menu_mark  -  get  and  set  the menu mark
        string
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <menu.h>
        int set_menu_mark(MENU *menu, const char *mark);
        const char *menu_mark(const MENU *menu);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        In order to make menu selections visible on  older  termi-
        nals  without  highlighting  or color capability, the menu
        library marks selected items  in  a  menu  with  a  prefix
@@ -79,8 +76,7 @@
        NULL if there is none).
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        The  function  menu_mark  returns  a pointer (which may be
        NULL).  It does not set errno.
 
@@ -97,25 +93,21 @@
             System error occurred (see errno).
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), menu(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <menu.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  routines  emulate  the System V menu library.  They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen Pfeifer.  Manual  pages  and  adaptation  for  new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/menu_new.3x.html b/doc/html/man/menu_new.3x.html
index 9c594917..38ccc52b 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/menu_new.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/menu_new.3x.html
@@ -46,20 +46,17 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        new_menu, free_menu - create and destroy menus
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <menu.h>
        MENU *new_menu(ITEM **items);
        int free_menu(MENU *menu);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The  function  new_menu  creates a new menu connected to a
        specified item pointer array (which  must  be  NULL-termi-
        nated).
@@ -68,8 +65,7 @@
        array and frees the storage allocated for the menu.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        The function new_menu returns  NULL  on  error.   It  sets
        errno according to the function's failure:
 
@@ -94,25 +90,21 @@
             The menu has already been posted.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), menu(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <menu.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  routines  emulate  the System V menu library.  They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen Pfeifer.  Manual  pages  and  adaptation  for  new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/menu_opts.3x.html b/doc/html/man/menu_opts.3x.html
index 0fa3d03f..7ee1424f 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/menu_opts.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/menu_opts.3x.html
@@ -46,14 +46,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        set_menu_opts,  menu_opts_on,  menu_opts_off,  menu_opts -
        set and get menu options
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <menu.h>
        int set_menu_opts(MENU *menu, Menu_Options opts);
        int menu_opts_on(MENU *menu, Menu_Options opts);
@@ -61,8 +59,7 @@
        Menu_Options menu_opts(const MENU *menu);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The function  set_menu_opts  sets  all  the  given  menu's
        option  bits  (menu  option  bits  may  be logically-OR'ed
        together).
@@ -100,8 +97,7 @@
             requests to the other end of the menu.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        Except for menu_opts, each routine returns one of the fol-
        lowing:
 
@@ -114,25 +110,21 @@
             The menu is already posted.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), menu(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <menu.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These routines emulate the System V  menu  library.   They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen  Pfeifer.   Manual  pages  and  adaptation for new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/menu_pattern.3x.html b/doc/html/man/menu_pattern.3x.html
index 4f251da3..bf7bf8f2 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/menu_pattern.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/menu_pattern.3x.html
@@ -45,21 +45,18 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        set_menu_pattern, menu_pattern - set and get a menu's pat-
        tern buffer
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <menu.h>
        int set_menu_pattern(MENU *menu, const char *pattern);
        char *menu_pattern(const MENU *menu);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        Every menu has an associated  pattern  match  buffer.   As
        input  events  that are printable characters come in, they
        are appended to this match buffer and tested for a  match,
@@ -74,8 +71,7 @@
        the given menu.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        The function menu_pattern returns a pointer, which is NULL
        if the menu parameter is NULL.  Otherwise, it is a pointer
        to a string which is empty if no pattern has been set.  It
@@ -104,25 +100,21 @@
             System error occurred (see errno).
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), menu(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <menu.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These routines emulate the System V  menu  library.   They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen  Pfeifer.   Manual  pages  and  adaptation for new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/menu_post.3x.html b/doc/html/man/menu_post.3x.html
index 9a922705..a6eee57c 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/menu_post.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/menu_post.3x.html
@@ -46,21 +46,18 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        post_menu, unpost_menu - write or erase menus from associ-
        ated subwindows
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <menu.h>
        int post_menu(MENU *menu);
        int unpost_menu(MENU *menu);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The function post_menu displays a menu to  its  associated
        subwindow.   To trigger physical display of the subwindow,
        use  refresh  or  some  equivalent  curses  routine   (the
@@ -72,8 +69,7 @@
        subwindow.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        These routines return one of the following:
 
        E_OK The routine succeeded.
@@ -103,25 +99,21 @@
             No items are connected to the menu.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), menu(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <menu.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These routines emulate the System V  menu  library.   They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen  Pfeifer.   Manual  pages  and  adaptation for new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/menu_requestname.3x.html b/doc/html/man/menu_requestname.3x.html
index 1e8529b1..fb4ab3ab 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/menu_requestname.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/menu_requestname.3x.html
@@ -46,21 +46,18 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        menu_request_by_name, menu_request_name - handle printable
        menu request names
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <menu.h>
        const char *menu_request_name(int request);
        int menu_request_by_name(const char *name);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The function menu_request_name returns the printable  name
        of a menu request code.
        The function menu_request_by_name searches in the name-ta-
@@ -68,35 +65,30 @@
        request code.  Otherwise E_NO_MATCH is returned.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        menu_request_name  returns NULL on error and sets errno to
        E_BAD_ARGUMENT.
        menu_request_by_name returns E_NO_MATCH on error.  It does
        not set errno.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), menu(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <menu.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These routines are specific to  ncurses.   They  were  not
        supported  on  Version 7, BSD or System V implementations.
        It is recommended that any code depending on them be  con-
        ditioned using NCURSES_VERSION.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen  Pfeifer.   Manual  pages  and  adaptation for new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/menu_spacing.3x.html b/doc/html/man/menu_spacing.3x.html
index 0ac3c25a..6e127cd1 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/menu_spacing.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/menu_spacing.3x.html
@@ -46,14 +46,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        set_menu_spacing,  menu_spacing  -  set  and  get  spacing
        between menu items.
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <menu.h>
        int set_menu_spacing(MENU *menu,
                             int spc_description,
@@ -65,8 +63,7 @@
                         int* spc_columns);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The function set_menu_spacing sets the spacing information
        for  the menu.  Its parameter spc_description controls the
        number of spaces between an item name and an item descrip-
@@ -86,34 +83,29 @@
        simply not returned.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        Both  routines  return  E_OK on success.  set_menu_spacing
        may return E_POSTED if the menu is posted, or  E_BAD_ARGU-
        MENT if one of the spacing values is out of range.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_variables(3x), menu(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <menu.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These routines are specific to  ncurses.   They  were  not
        supported  on  Version 7, BSD or System V implementations.
        It is recommended that any code depending on them be  con-
        ditioned using NCURSES_VERSION.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen  Pfeifer.   Manual  pages  and  adaptation for new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/menu_userptr.3x.html b/doc/html/man/menu_userptr.3x.html
index d225e022..634e58af 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/menu_userptr.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/menu_userptr.3x.html
@@ -46,48 +46,41 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        set_menu_userptr,  menu_userptr  -  associate  application
        data with a menu item
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <menu.h>
        int set_menu_userptr(MENU *menu, void *userptr);
        void *menu_userptr(const MENU *menu);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        Every menu and every menu item has a  field  that  can  be
        used to hold application-specific data (that is, the menu-
        driver code leaves it alone).  These functions get and set
        the menu user pointer field.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        menu_userptr  returns  a  pointer (which may be NULL).  It
        does not set errno.
 
        set_menu_userptr returns E_OK (success).
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), menu(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <menu.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  routines  emulate  the System V menu library.  They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
@@ -95,8 +88,7 @@
        it as a char pointer for SVr4 compatibility.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen  Pfeifer.   Manual  pages  and  adaptation for new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/menu_win.3x.html b/doc/html/man/menu_win.3x.html
index 1321df19..2c523b9b 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/menu_win.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/menu_win.3x.html
@@ -46,14 +46,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        menu_win  - make and break menu window and subwindow asso-
        ciations
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <menu.h>
        int set_menu_win(MENU *menu, WINDOW *win);
        WINDOW *menu_win(const MENU *menu);
@@ -62,8 +60,7 @@
        int scale_menu(const MENU *menu, int *rows, int *columns);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        Every menu has an associated pair of curses windows.   The
        menu  window displays any title and border associated with
        the window; the menu subwindow displays the items  of  the
@@ -82,8 +79,7 @@
        for the subwindow of menu.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        Routines  that return pointers return NULL on error.  Rou-
        tines that return an integer return one of  the  following
        error codes:
@@ -104,25 +100,21 @@
             No items are connected to the menu.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_variables(3x), menu(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <menu.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  routines  emulate  the System V menu library.  They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen Pfeifer.  Manual  pages  and  adaptation  for  new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/mitem_current.3x.html b/doc/html/man/mitem_current.3x.html
index 2ee61a24..66c68a5c 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/mitem_current.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/mitem_current.3x.html
@@ -46,13 +46,11 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        mitem_current - set and get current_menu_item
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <menu.h>
        int set_current_item(MENU *menu, const ITEM *item);
        ITEM *current_item(const MENU *menu);
@@ -61,8 +59,7 @@
        int item_index(const ITEM *item);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The  function  set_current_item sets the current item (the
        item on  which  the  menu  cursor  is  positioned).   cur-
        rent_item  returns  a  pointer  to the current item in the
@@ -79,8 +76,7 @@
        item in the menu's item pointer list.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        current_item returns a pointer (which may  be  NULL).   It
        does not set errno.
 
@@ -107,19 +103,16 @@
             System error occurred (see errno).
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), menu(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <menu.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These routines emulate the System V  menu  library.   They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
@@ -128,8 +121,7 @@
        ERR).
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen  Pfeifer.   Manual  pages  and  adaptation for new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/mitem_name.3x.html b/doc/html/man/mitem_name.3x.html
index aa0c2499..9d03d723 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/mitem_name.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/mitem_name.3x.html
@@ -46,52 +46,44 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        item_name,  item_description  -  get  menu  item  name and
        description fields
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <menu.h>
        const char *item_name(const ITEM *item);
        const char *item_description(const ITEM *item);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The function item_name returns the name part of the  given
        item.
        The function item_description returns the description part
        of the given item.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        These routines return a pointer (which may be NULL).  They
        do not set errno.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), menu(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <menu.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These routines emulate the System V  menu  library.   They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen  Pfeifer.   Manual  pages  and  adaptation for new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/mitem_new.3x.html b/doc/html/man/mitem_new.3x.html
index 79be0728..43da4490 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/mitem_new.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/mitem_new.3x.html
@@ -46,20 +46,17 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        new_item, free_item - create and destroy menu items
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <menu.h>
        ITEM *new_item(const char *name, const char *description);
        int free_item(ITEM *item);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The function new_item allocates a new item and initializes
        it from the name and description pointers.  Please  notice
        that  the  item  stores  only the pointers to the name and
@@ -72,8 +69,7 @@
        item.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        The  function  new_item  returns  NULL  on error.  It sets
        errno according to the function's failure:
 
@@ -99,25 +95,21 @@
             System error occurred (see errno).
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), menu(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <menu.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  routines  emulate  the System V menu library.  They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen Pfeifer.  Manual  pages  and  adaptation  for  new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/mitem_opts.3x.html b/doc/html/man/mitem_opts.3x.html
index e5aa6d92..c0928067 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/mitem_opts.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/mitem_opts.3x.html
@@ -46,14 +46,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        set_item_opts,  item_opts_on,  item_opts_off,  item_opts -
        set and get menu item options
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <menu.h>
        int set_item_opts(ITEM *item, Item_Options opts);
        int item_opts_on(ITEM *item, Item_Options opts);
@@ -61,8 +59,7 @@
        Item_Options item_opts(const ITEM *item);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The function  set_item_opts  sets  all  the  given  item's
        option  bits  (menu  option  bits  may  be logically-OR'ed
        together).
@@ -81,8 +78,7 @@
        cessing.  This option defaults to on.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        Except for item_opts, each routine returns one of the fol-
        lowing:
 
@@ -92,25 +88,21 @@
             System error occurred (see errno).
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), menu(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <menu.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  routines  emulate  the System V menu library.  They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen Pfeifer.  Manual  pages  and  adaptation  for  new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/mitem_userptr.3x.html b/doc/html/man/mitem_userptr.3x.html
index b5cd4ed3..78a21f25 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/mitem_userptr.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/mitem_userptr.3x.html
@@ -46,47 +46,40 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        set_item_userptr,  item_userptr  -  associate  application
        data with a menu item
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <menu.h>
        int set_item_userptr(ITEM *item, void *userptr);
        void *item_userptr(const ITEM *item);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        Every menu item has a field  that  can  be  used  to  hold
        application-specific  data  (that is, the menu-driver code
        leaves it alone).  These functions get and set that field.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        The function  item_userptr  returns  a  pointer  (possibly
        NULL).  It does not set errno.
 
        The set_item_userptr always returns E_OK (success).
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), menu(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <menu.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These routines emulate the System V  menu  library.   They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
@@ -94,8 +87,7 @@
        it as a char pointer for SVr4 compatibility.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen Pfeifer.  Manual  pages  and  adaptation  for  new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/mitem_value.3x.html b/doc/html/man/mitem_value.3x.html
index a98fd7db..a951522c 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/mitem_value.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/mitem_value.3x.html
@@ -45,20 +45,17 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        set_item_value, item_value - set and get menu item values
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <menu.h>
        int set_item_value(ITEM *item, bool value);
        bool item_value(const ITEM *item);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        If  you  turn  off  the menu option O_ONEVALUE (e.g., with
        set_menu_opts or menu_opts_off;  see  menu_opts(3x)),  the
        menu becomes multi-valued; that is, more than one item may
@@ -69,8 +66,7 @@
        lect it (second argument FALSE).
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        The function set_item_value returns one of the following:
 
        E_OK The routine succeeded.
@@ -82,25 +78,21 @@
             The menu driver could not process the request.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), menu(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <menu.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  routines  emulate  the System V menu library.  They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen Pfeifer.  Manual  pages  and  adaptation  for  new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/mitem_visible.3x.html b/doc/html/man/mitem_visible.3x.html
index 7027e52f..705c8bda 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/mitem_visible.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/mitem_visible.3x.html
@@ -46,44 +46,37 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        mitem_visible - check visibility of a menu item
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <menu.h>
        bool item_visible(const ITEM *item);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        A  menu  item  is  visible  when it is in the portion of a
        posted menu that is mapped onto the screen (if the menu is
        scrollable,  in  particular,  this portion will be smaller
        than the whole menu).
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), menu(3x).
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header file <menu.h> automatically includes the header
        file <curses.h>.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        These  routines  emulate  the System V menu library.  They
        were not supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Juergen Pfeifer.  Manual  pages  and  adaptation  for  new
        curses by Eric S. Raymond.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/ncurses.3x.html b/doc/html/man/ncurses.3x.html
index 9e434853..25bac76a 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/ncurses.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/ncurses.3x.html
@@ -46,24 +46,21 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        ncurses - CRT screen handling and optimization package
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The  ncurses  library  routines  give the user a terminal-
        independent method of updating character screens with rea-
        sonable optimization.  This implementation is "new curses"
        (ncurses) and is the approved replacement for 4.4BSD clas-
        sic  curses,  which has been discontinued.  This describes
-       ncurses version 6.0 (patch 20151205).
+       ncurses version 6.0 (patch 20160130).
 
        The ncurses library emulates the curses library of  System
        V  Release  4  UNIX,  and  XPG4 (X/Open Portability Guide)
@@ -97,8 +94,7 @@
        access to low-level terminal-manipulation routines.
 
 
-
-

Initialization

+

Initialization

        The  library uses the locale which the calling program has
        initialized.  That is normally done with setlocale:
 
@@ -135,8 +131,7 @@
        for doing this.  [See terminfo(5) for further details.]
 
 
-
-

Datatypes

+

Datatypes

        The ncurses library permits manipulation  of  data  struc-
        tures,  called  windows,  which  can be thought of as two-
        dimensional arrays of characters representing all or  part
@@ -182,8 +177,7 @@
        <curses.h>, such as A_REVERSE, ACS_HLINE, and KEY_LEFT.
 
 
-
-

Environment variables

+

Environment variables

        If the environment variables LINES and COLUMNS are set, or
        if  the program is executing in a window environment, line
        and column information in the  environment  will  override
@@ -224,8 +218,7 @@
        curscr can be used in only a few routines.
 
 
-
-

Routine and Argument Names

+

Routine and Argument Names

        Many  curses routines have two or more versions.  The rou-
        tines prefixed with w require a window argument.  The rou-
        tines prefixed with p require a pad argument.  Those with-
@@ -306,8 +299,7 @@
                becomes wadd_wch.
 
 
-
-

Routine Name Index

+

Routine Name Index

        The following table lists each curses routine and the name
        of the manual page on which  it  is  described.   Routines
        flagged  with  `*'  are ncurses-specific, not described by
@@ -766,8 +758,7 @@
               wvline_set              curs_border_set(3x)
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        Routines that return an integer return  ERR  upon  failure
        and  an  integer value other than ERR upon successful com-
        pletion, unless otherwise noted in  the  routine  descrip-
@@ -785,8 +776,7 @@
        Routines that return pointers return NULL on error.
 
 
-
-

ENVIRONMENT

+

ENVIRONMENT

        The following environment symbols are useful for customiz-
        ing the runtime behavior of the ncurses library.  The most
        important ones have been already discussed in detail.
@@ -802,8 +792,7 @@
        it does not happen to be a single character.
 
 
-
-

BAUDRATE

+

BAUDRATE

        The  debugging  library  checks  this environment variable
        when the application has redirected output to a file.  The
        variable's  numeric value is used for the baudrate.  If no
@@ -812,8 +801,7 @@
        costs that depend on baudrate.
 
 
-
-

COLUMNS

+

COLUMNS

        Specify the width of the screen in  characters.   Applica-
        tions  running in a windowing environment usually are able
        to obtain the width of the window in which they  are  exe-
@@ -844,8 +832,7 @@
        system calls or the terminal database.
 
 
-
-

ESCDELAY

+

ESCDELAY

        Specifies  the  total  time,  in  milliseconds,  for which
        ncurses will await a character sequence, e.g., a  function
        key.   The default value, 1000 milliseconds, is enough for
@@ -874,8 +861,7 @@
        lems when compiling an application.
 
 
-
-

HOME

+

HOME

        Tells ncurses where your home directory is.  That is where
        it may read and write auxiliary terminal descriptions:
 
@@ -883,14 +869,12 @@
        $HOME/.terminfo
 
 
-
-

LINES

+

LINES

        Like  COLUMNS, specify the height of the screen in charac-
        ters.  See COLUMNS for a detailed description.
 
 
-
-

MOUSE_BUTTONS_123

+

MOUSE_BUTTONS_123

        This applies only to the OS/2 EMX port.  It specifies  the
        order  of  buttons  on the mouse.  OS/2 numbers a 3-button
        mouse inconsistently from other platforms:
@@ -904,8 +888,7 @@
        or 321.  If it is not specified, ncurses uses 132.
 
 
-
-

NCURSES_ASSUMED_COLORS

+

NCURSES_ASSUMED_COLORS

        Override the compiled-in assumption  that  the  terminal's
        default   colors   are  white-on-black  (see  default_col-
        ors(3x)).  You may set the foreground and background color
@@ -917,8 +900,7 @@
        value is allowed.
 
 
-
-

NCURSES_CONSOLE2

+

NCURSES_CONSOLE2

        This applies only to the MinGW port of ncurses.
 
        The Console2 program's handling of the  Microsoft  Console
@@ -930,8 +912,7 @@
        same effect.
 
 
-
-

NCURSES_GPM_TERMS

+

NCURSES_GPM_TERMS

        This applies only to ncurses configured  to  use  the  GPM
        interface.
 
@@ -945,8 +926,7 @@
        attempt to open GPM if TERM contains "linux".
 
 
-
-

NCURSES_NO_HARD_TABS

+

NCURSES_NO_HARD_TABS

        Ncurses may use tabs as part of the cursor movement  opti-
        mization.   In  some  cases,  your terminal driver may not
        handle these properly.  Set this environment  variable  to
@@ -959,8 +939,7 @@
        environment variable.
 
 
-
-

NCURSES_NO_PADDING

+

NCURSES_NO_PADDING

        Most of the terminal descriptions in the terminfo database
        are written for real "hardware"  terminals.   Many  people
        use  terminal  emulators which run in a windowing environ-
@@ -987,8 +966,7 @@
        part of special control sequences such as flash.
 
 
-
-

NCURSES_NO_SETBUF

+

NCURSES_NO_SETBUF

        This setting is obsolete.  Before changes
 
           o   started with 5.9 patch 20120825 and
@@ -1018,8 +996,7 @@
        level curses calls do not.
 
 
-
-

NCURSES_NO_UTF8_ACS

+

NCURSES_NO_UTF8_ACS

        During initialization, the ncurses library checks for spe-
        cial cases where VT100 line-drawing (and the corresponding
        alternate character set  capabilities)  described  in  the
@@ -1055,8 +1032,7 @@
        interface.
 
 
-
-

NCURSES_TRACE

+

NCURSES_TRACE

        During   initialization,  the  ncurses  debugging  library
        checks the NCURSES_TRACE environment variable.  If  it  is
        defined, to a numeric value, ncurses calls the trace func-
@@ -1070,8 +1046,7 @@
        See curs_trace(3x) for more information.
 
 
-
-

TERM

+

TERM

        Denotes  your  terminal  type.  Each terminal type is dis-
        tinct, though many are similar.
 
@@ -1091,8 +1066,7 @@
        match that setting.
 
 
-
-

TERMCAP

+

TERMCAP

        If  the  ncurses  library has been configured with termcap
        support, ncurses will check for a  terminal's  description
        in  termcap  form  if  it is not available in the terminfo
@@ -1106,8 +1080,7 @@
        mation, e.g., /etc/termcap.
 
 
-
-

TERMINFO

+

TERMINFO

        Overrides the directory in which ncurses searches for your
        terminal description.  This is the simplest, but  not  the
        only  way to change the list of directories.  The complete
@@ -1135,8 +1108,7 @@
                  MINFO variable)
 
 
-
-

TERMINFO_DIRS

+

TERMINFO_DIRS

        Specifies  a  list  of  directories to search for terminal
        descriptions.  The list is separated by colons (i.e., ":")
        on Unix, semicolons on OS/2 EMX.
@@ -1155,8 +1127,7 @@
        of a termcap file.
 
 
-
-

TERMPATH

+

TERMPATH

        If TERMCAP does not hold a file name then  ncurses  checks
        the  TERMPATH  environment  variable.   This  is a list of
        filenames separated by spaces or  colons  (i.e.,  ":")  on
@@ -1173,8 +1144,7 @@
        $TERMINFO, $TERMINFO_DIRS, $TERMPATH, as well as $HOME.
 
 
-
-

ALTERNATE CONFIGURATIONS

+

ALTERNATE CONFIGURATIONS

        Several  different  configurations are possible, depending
        on  the  configure  script  options  used  when   building
        ncurses.   There  are a few main options whose effects are
@@ -1255,23 +1225,20 @@
             ing it is always in the debug library.
 
 
-
-

FILES

+

FILES

        /usr/share/tabset
             directory  containing  initialization  files  for the
             terminal capability database /usr/share/terminfo ter-
             minal capability database
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        terminfo(5)  and  related  pages whose names begin "curs_"
        for detailed routine descriptions.
        curs_variables(3x)
 
 
-
-

EXTENSIONS

+

EXTENSIONS

        The  ncurses  library  can  be  compiled  with  an  option
        (-DUSE_GETCAP) that falls back to the old-style /etc/term-
        cap file if the terminal setup code cannot find a terminfo
@@ -1310,8 +1277,7 @@
        device.  See the curs_print(3x) manual page for details.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        The  ncurses  library is intended to be BASE-level confor-
        mant with XSI Curses.  The EXTENDED XSI Curses functional-
        ity (including color support) is supported.
@@ -1374,8 +1340,7 @@
        package's portability correspondingly.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The header  file  <curses.h>  automatically  includes  the
        header files <stdio.h> and <unctrl.h>.
 
@@ -1385,8 +1350,7 @@
        ture of AT&T System V Release 3 curses.
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Zeyd M. Ben-Halim, Eric  S.  Raymond,  Thomas  E.  Dickey.
        Based on pcurses by Pavel Curtis.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/panel.3x.html b/doc/html/man/panel.3x.html
index 5d18ab1d..3057e74c 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/panel.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/panel.3x.html
@@ -45,13 +45,11 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        panel - panel stack extension for curses
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <panel.h>
 
        cc [flags] sourcefiles -lpanel -lncurses
@@ -73,8 +71,7 @@
        int del_panel(PANEL *pan);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        Panels  are  curses(3x)  windows with the added feature of
        depth.  Panel functions allow the use of  stacked  windows
        and  ensure  the  proper  portions  of each window and the
@@ -94,8 +91,7 @@
        minfo curses does.
 
 
-
-

FUNCTIONS

+

FUNCTIONS

        new_panel(win)
               allocates   a   PANEL structure, associates it with
               win, places the panel  on  the  top  of  the  stack
@@ -172,15 +168,13 @@
               returns a pointer to the window of the given panel.
 
 
-
-

DIAGNOSTICS

+

DIAGNOSTICS

        Each  routine  that  returns  a pointer returns NULL if an
        error occurs. Each  routine  that  returns  an  int  value
        returns OK if it executes successfully and ERR if not.
 
 
-
-

COMPATIBILITY

+

COMPATIBILITY

        Reasonable  care  has been taken to  ensure  compatibility
        with  the  native  panel  facility  introduced  in  SVr3.2
        (inspection of the SVr4 manual pages suggests the program-
@@ -199,30 +193,26 @@
        libraries.
 
 
-
-

NOTE

+

NOTE

        In your library list, libpanel.a should  be  before  libn-
        curses.a;  that  is,  you want to say `-lpanel -lncurses',
        not the other way around (which would usually give a link-
        error).
 
 
-
-

FILES

+

FILES

        panel.h interface for the panels library
 
        libpanel.a the panels library itself
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_variables(3x),
 
-       This describes ncurses version 6.0 (patch 20151205).
+       This describes ncurses version 6.0 (patch 20160130).
 
 
-
-

AUTHOR

+

AUTHOR

        Originally   written   by   Warren  Tucker  <wht@n4hgf.mt-
        park.ga.us>, primarily to assist  in  porting  u386mon  to
        systems  without  a native panels library.  Repackaged for
diff --git a/doc/html/man/resizeterm.3x.html b/doc/html/man/resizeterm.3x.html
index e1a8c723..31965414 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/resizeterm.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/resizeterm.3x.html
@@ -46,14 +46,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        is_term_resized,  resize_term,  resizeterm  -  change  the
        curses terminal size
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        bool is_term_resized(int lines, int columns);
@@ -61,16 +59,14 @@
        int resizeterm(int lines, int columns);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        This is an extension to the curses library.   It  provides
        callers  with  a hook into the ncurses data to resize win-
        dows, primarily for use by programs running in an X Window
        terminal (e.g., xterm).
 
 
-
-

resizeterm

+

resizeterm

        The  function  resizeterm resizes the standard and current
        windows to the specified  dimensions,  and  adjusts  other
        bookkeeping  data  used by the ncurses library that record
@@ -78,8 +74,7 @@
        ables.
 
 
-
-

resize_term

+

resize_term

        Most   of   the   work  is  done  by  the  inner  function
        resize_term.  The outer function resizeterm adds bookkeep-
        ing  for the SIGWINCH handler.  When resizing the windows,
@@ -91,24 +86,21 @@
        tional interaction with the application.
 
 
-
-

is_term_resized

+

is_term_resized

        A  support  function  is_term_resized  is provided so that
        applications can check if the resize_term  function  would
        modify the window structures.  It returns TRUE if the win-
        dows would be modified, and FALSE otherwise.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        Except as noted, these functions return  the  integer  ERR
        upon  failure and OK on success.  They will fail if either
        of the dimensions are less than or equal to zero, or if an
        error occurs while (re)allocating memory for the windows.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        While these functions are intended to be used to support a
        signal handler (i.e., for SIGWINCH), care should be  taken
        to  avoid invoking them in a context where malloc or real-
@@ -143,8 +135,7 @@
        WINCH is received, no screen size change may be recorded.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        It is possible to resize the screen with SVr4 curses, by
 
        o   exiting curses with endwin(3x) and
@@ -157,13 +148,11 @@
        was adopted in NetBSD curses (2001) and PDCurses (2003).
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curs_getch(3x), curs_variables(3x), wresize(3x).
 
 
-
-

AUTHOR

+

AUTHOR

        Thomas Dickey (from an equivalent function written in 1988
        for BSD curses).
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/tabs.1.html b/doc/html/man/tabs.1.html
index aa1dca00..ab5201a4 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/tabs.1.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/tabs.1.html
@@ -45,18 +45,15 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        tabs - set tabs on a terminal
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        tabs [options]] [tabstop-list]
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The  tabs  program clears and sets tab-stops on the termi-
        nal.  This uses the terminfo  clear_all_tabs  and  set_tab
        capabilities.   If  either  is  absent,  tabs is unable to
@@ -66,11 +63,9 @@
               stty tab0
 
 
-
-

OPTIONS

+

OPTIONS

 
-
-

General Options

+

General Options

        -Tname
             Tell tabs which terminal type to use.  If this option
             is not given, tabs will  use  the  $TERM  environment
@@ -95,8 +90,7 @@
        the one that determines the list to be processed.
 
 
-
-

Implicit Lists

+

Implicit Lists

        Use  a  single number as an option, e.g., "-5" to set tabs
        at the given interval (in this case  1,  6,  11,  16,  21,
        etc.).   Tabs  are  repeated up to the right margin of the
@@ -107,8 +101,7 @@
        Use "-8" to set tabs to the standard interval.
 
 
-
-

Explicit Lists

+

Explicit Lists

        An explicit list can be defined after  the  options  (this
        does  not  use  a "-").  The values in the list must be in
        increasing numeric order, and greater than zero.  They are
@@ -124,8 +117,7 @@
        which is equivalent to the 1,6,11,16,21 example.
 
 
-
-

Predefined Tab-Stops

+

Predefined Tab-Stops

        X/Open defines several predefined lists of tab stops.
 
        -a   Assembler, IBM S/370, first format
@@ -147,8 +139,7 @@
        -u   UNIVAC 1100 Assembler
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        X/Open describes a +m option, to set  a  terminal's  left-
        margin.   Very few of the entries in the terminal database
        provide this capability.
@@ -164,11 +155,10 @@
        be that long.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        tset(1), infocmp(1m), curses(3x), terminfo(5).
 
-       This describes ncurses version 6.0 (patch 20151205).
+       This describes ncurses version 6.0 (patch 20160130).
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/term.5.html b/doc/html/man/term.5.html
index 221db40a..ef2781a6 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/term.5.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/term.5.html
@@ -45,21 +45,17 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        term - format of compiled term file.
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        term
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

 
-
-

STORAGE LOCATION

+

STORAGE LOCATION

        Compiled terminfo descriptions are placed under the direc-
        tory /usr/share/terminfo.   Two  configurations  are  sup-
        ported (when building the ncurses libraries):
@@ -92,8 +88,7 @@
             existing directory, and hashed database otherwise.
 
 
-
-

STORAGE FORMAT

+

STORAGE FORMAT

        The format has been chosen so that it will be the same  on
        all  hardware.   An  8 or more bit byte is assumed, but no
        assumptions about byte  ordering  or  sign  extension  are
@@ -172,8 +167,7 @@
        section.  Each string is null terminated.
 
 
-
-

EXTENDED STORAGE FORMAT

+

EXTENDED STORAGE FORMAT

        The  previous  section describes the conventional terminfo
        binary format.  With some minor variations of the  offsets
        (see  PORTABILITY),  the same binary format is used in all
@@ -212,8 +206,7 @@
        e.g., booleans, then numbers and finally strings.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        Note that it is possible for setupterm to expect a differ-
        ent  set  of capabilities than are actually present in the
        file.  Either the database may  have  been  updated  since
@@ -238,8 +231,7 @@
        sion of terminfo source compatibility issues.
 
 
-
-

EXAMPLE

+

EXAMPLE

        As  an  example, here is a hex dump of the description for
        the Lear-Siegler ADM-3, a  popular  though  rather  stupid
        early terminal:
@@ -276,25 +268,21 @@
 
 
 
-
-

LIMITS

+

LIMITS

        Some  limitations:  total  compiled  entries cannot exceed
        4096 bytes.  The name field cannot exceed 128 bytes.
 
 
-
-

FILES

+

FILES

        /usr/share/terminfo/*/*  compiled terminal capability data
        base
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), terminfo(5).
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Thomas E. Dickey
        extended terminfo format for ncurses 5.0
        hashed database support for ncurses 5.6
diff --git a/doc/html/man/term.7.html b/doc/html/man/term.7.html
index 749139ed..2cb2c11d 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/term.7.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/term.7.html
@@ -45,13 +45,11 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        term - conventions for naming terminal types
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The  environment variable TERM should normally contain the
        type name of the terminal, console or display-device  type
        you  are  using.   This  information  is  critical for all
@@ -215,15 +213,13 @@
        environment variable when no -T option is specified.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        For  maximum  compatibility  with  older  System V UNIXes,
        names and aliases should be unique  within  the  first  14
        characters.
 
 
-
-

FILES

+

FILES

        /usr/share/terminfo/?/*
             compiled terminal capability data base
 
@@ -234,8 +230,7 @@
             tty line initialization (BSD-like UNIXes)
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), terminfo(5), term(5).
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/term_variables.3x.html b/doc/html/man/term_variables.3x.html
index 0005184e..799b0a0f 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/term_variables.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/term_variables.3x.html
@@ -45,15 +45,13 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        SP, acs_map, boolcodes, boolfnames, boolnames, cur_term,
        numcodes, numfnames, numnames, strcodes, strfnames,
        strnames, ttytype - curses terminfo global variables
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
        #include <term.h>
 
@@ -78,8 +76,7 @@
        NCURSES_CONST char * const * strnames;
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        This  page summarizes variables provided by the curses li-
        brary's low-level terminfo interface.  A more complete de-
        scription is given in the curs_terminfo(3x) manual page.
@@ -91,8 +88,7 @@
        ing the library.
 
 
-
-

Alternate Character Set Mapping

+

Alternate Character Set Mapping

        After  initializing the curses or terminfo interfaces, the
        acs_map array holds information used  to  translate  cells
        with  the  A_ALTCHARSET  video attribute into line-drawing
@@ -106,8 +102,7 @@
        private variable.
 
 
-
-

Current Terminal Data

+

Current Terminal Data

        After  initializing the curses or terminfo interfaces, the
        cur_term contains data describing  the  current  terminal.
        This variable is also set as a side-effect of curs_initscr(3x)
@@ -119,8 +114,7 @@
        from newterm or setupterm to reuse in set_term.
 
 
-
-

Terminfo Names

+

Terminfo Names

        The  tic(1m)  and infocmp(1m) programs use lookup tables for
        the long and short names of terminfo capabilities, as well
        as  the  corresponding  names  for  termcap  capabilities.
@@ -138,14 +132,12 @@
        scriptions: boolcodes, numcodes, and strcodes.
 
 
-
-

Terminal Type

+

Terminal Type

        On  initialization  of  the curses or terminfo interfaces,
        setupterm copies the terminal name to the array ttytype.
 
 
-
-

Terminfo Names

+

Terminfo Names

        In addition to the variables, <term.h> also defines a sym-
        bol  for each terminfo capability long name.  These are in
        terms of the symbol CUR, which is defined
@@ -156,15 +148,13 @@
        fo capabilities than using tigetstr(3x), etc.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The  low-level  terminfo  interface  is  initialized using
        curs_terminfo(3x).  The upper-level curses interface uses  the
        low-level terminfo interface, internally.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        X/Open  Curses  does  not describe any of these except for
        cur_term.  (The inclusion of cur_term  appears  to  be  an
        oversight, since other comparable low-level information is
@@ -180,8 +170,7 @@
        variable.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x),      curs_terminfo(3x),      curs_threads(3x),
        terminfo(5).
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/terminfo.5.html b/doc/html/man/terminfo.5.html
index 13e890bb..4ab7625d 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/terminfo.5.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/terminfo.5.html
@@ -60,25 +60,22 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        terminfo - terminal capability data base
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        /usr/share/terminfo/*/*
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        Terminfo  is  a  data  base  describing terminals, used by
        screen-oriented programs  such  as  nvi(1),  rogue(1)  and
        libraries  such  as curses(3x).  Terminfo describes termi-
        nals by giving a set of capabilities which they  have,  by
        specifying how to perform screen operations, and by speci-
        fying padding requirements and  initialization  sequences.
-       This describes ncurses version 6.0 (patch 20151205).
+       This describes ncurses version 6.0 (patch 20160130).
 
        Entries in terminfo consist of a sequence of `,' separated
        fields (embedded commas may be escaped with a backslash or
@@ -133,8 +130,7 @@
        manual page.
 
 
-
-

Predefined Capabilities

+

Predefined Capabilities

        The  following  is  a  complete  table of the capabilities
        included in a terminfo description block and available  to
        terminfo-using code.  In each line of the table,
@@ -1025,8 +1021,7 @@
                                              termcap).
 
 
-
-

User-Defined Capabilities

+

User-Defined Capabilities

        The  preceding section listed the predefined capabilities.
        They deal with some  special  features  for  terminals  no
        longer  (or  possibly never) produced.  Occasionally there
@@ -1069,8 +1064,7 @@
        available using terminfo.
 
 
-
-

A Sample Entry

+

A Sample Entry

        The following entry, describing an ANSI-standard terminal,
        is  representative  of  what a terminfo entry for a modern
        terminal typically looks like.
@@ -1121,8 +1115,7 @@
            be used to perform particular terminal operations.
 
 
-
-

Types of Capabilities

+

Types of Capabilities

        All capabilities have names.  For instance, the fact  that
        ANSI-standard  terminals  have automatic margins (i.e., an
        automatic return and line-feed when the end of a  line  is
@@ -1194,8 +1187,7 @@
        example, see the second ind in the example above.
 
 
-
-

Fetching Compiled Descriptions

+

Fetching Compiled Descriptions

        The ncurses library searches for terminal descriptions  in
        several places.  It uses only the first description found.
        The library has a compiled-in list  of  places  to  search
@@ -1232,8 +1224,7 @@
                (the compiled-in default).
 
 
-
-

Preparing Descriptions

+

Preparing Descriptions

        We  now  outline how to prepare descriptions of terminals.
        The most effective way to prepare a  terminal  description
        is  by  imitating the description of a similar terminal in
@@ -1253,8 +1244,7 @@
        acter.
 
 
-
-

Basic Capabilities

+

Basic Capabilities

        The  number  of  columns  on each line for the terminal is
        given by the cols numeric capability.  If the terminal  is
        a  CRT, then the number of lines on the screen is given by
@@ -1332,8 +1322,7 @@
                ind=^J, lines#24,
 
 
-
-

Parameterized Strings

+

Parameterized Strings

        Cursor addressing and other strings  requiring  parameters
        in  the  terminal  are described by a parameterized string
        capability, with printf-like escapes such  as  %x  in  it.
@@ -1463,8 +1452,7 @@
        More complex arithmetic is possible using the stack.
 
 
-
-

Cursor Motions

+

Cursor Motions

        If the terminal has a fast way to home the cursor (to very
        upper  left  corner  of  screen) then this can be given as
        home; similarly a fast way of getting to the  lower  left-
@@ -1504,8 +1492,7 @@
        rmcup), specify nrrmc.
 
 
-
-

Area Clears

+

Area Clears

        If the terminal can clear from the current position to the
        end  of  the  line,  leaving  the cursor where it is, this
        should be given as el.  If the terminal can clear from the
@@ -1518,8 +1505,7 @@
        number of lines, if a true ed is not available.)
 
 
-
-

Insert/delete line and vertical motions

+

Insert/delete line and vertical motions

        If  the terminal can open a new blank line before the line
        where the cursor is, this should be given as il1; this  is
        done  only  from the first position of a line.  The cursor
@@ -1582,8 +1568,7 @@
        bring down non-blank lines.
 
 
-
-

Insert/Delete Character

+

Insert/Delete Character

        There are two basic kinds of  intelligent  terminals  with
        respect  to insert/delete character which can be described
        using terminfo.  The most common  insert/delete  character
@@ -1672,8 +1657,7 @@
        with one parameter.
 
 
-
-

Highlighting, Underlining, and Visible Bells

+

Highlighting, Underlining, and Visible Bells

        If  your  terminal  has  one  or  more  kinds  of  display
        attributes, these can be represented in a number  of  dif-
        ferent ways.  You should choose one display form as stand-
@@ -1801,8 +1785,7 @@
        giving eo.
 
 
-
-

Keypad and Function Keys

+

Keypad and Function Keys

        If the terminal has a keypad that transmits codes when the
        keys  are  pressed,  this  information can be given.  Note
        that it is not possible to handle terminals where the key-
@@ -1883,8 +1866,7 @@
        visible.
 
 
-
-

Tabs and Initialization

+

Tabs and Initialization

        If  the terminal has hardware tabs, the command to advance
        to the next tab stop can be given as ht  (usually  control
        I).  A "back-tab" command which moves leftward to the pre-
@@ -1963,8 +1945,7 @@
        if.
 
 
-
-

Delays and Padding

+

Delays and Padding

        Many  older  and  slower  terminals  do not support either
        XON/XOFF or DTR handshaking, including hard copy terminals
        and  some  very  archaic CRTs (including, for example, DEC
@@ -1991,8 +1972,7 @@
        first character of the pad string is used.
 
 
-
-

Status Lines

+

Status Lines

        Some terminals have an extra "status line"  which  is  not
        normally  used  by  software  (and thus not counted in the
        terminal's lines capability).
@@ -2028,8 +2008,7 @@
        become important.
 
 
-
-

Line Graphics

+

Line Graphics

        Many terminals have alternate character  sets  useful  for
        forms-drawing.   Terminfo  and curses build in support for
        the drawing characters supported by the VT100,  with  some
@@ -2080,8 +2059,7 @@
        ACSC string.
 
 
-
-

Color Handling

+

Color Handling

        Most color terminals are either "Tektronix-like"  or  "HP-
        like".   Tektronix-like terminals have a predefined set of
        N colors (where N usually 8), and can  set  character-cell
@@ -2205,8 +2183,7 @@
        and optimizes the output in favor of colors.
 
 
-
-

Miscellaneous

+

Miscellaneous

        If the terminal requires other than a null (zero)  charac-
        ter  as  a  pad,  then this can be given as pad.  Only the
        first character of the pad string is used.  If the  termi-
@@ -2280,8 +2257,7 @@
        printer while an mc5p is in effect.
 
 
-
-

Glitches and Braindamage

+

Glitches and Braindamage

        Hazeltine terminals, which do not allow "~" characters  to
        be displayed should indicate hz.
 
@@ -2314,8 +2290,7 @@
        adding more capabilities of the form xx.
 
 
-
-

Similar Terminals

+

Similar Terminals

        If there are two very similar terminals, one (the variant)
        can be defined as being just like  the  other  (the  base)
        with  certain  exceptions.  In the definition of the vari-
@@ -2340,8 +2315,7 @@
        modes for a terminal, or for different user preferences.
 
 
-
-

Pitfalls of Long Entries

+

Pitfalls of Long Entries

        Long terminfo entries are unlikely to  be  a  problem;  to
        date,  no  entry  has even approached terminfo's 4096-byte
        string-table maximum.  Unfortunately, the termcap transla-
@@ -2427,8 +2401,7 @@
        lengths.
 
 
-
-

Binary Compatibility

+

Binary Compatibility

        It is not wise to count on portability of binary  terminfo
        entries  between commercial UNIX versions.  The problem is
        that there are at least two versions  of  terminfo  (under
@@ -2438,8 +2411,7 @@
        and XSI Curses extensions.
 
 
-
-

EXTENSIONS

+

EXTENSIONS

        Searching for terminal descriptions in $HOME/.terminfo and
        TERMINFO_DIRS is not supported by older implementations.
 
@@ -2508,20 +2480,17 @@
        OSF -- Supports both the SVr4 set and the AIX extensions.
 
 
-
-

FILES

+

FILES

        /usr/share/terminfo/?/*  files     containing     terminal
                                 descriptions
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        tic(1m),  infocmp(1m),  curses(3x),  printf(3),   term(5).
        term_variables(3x).
 
 
-
-

AUTHORS

+

AUTHORS

        Zeyd  M.  Ben-Halim,  Eric  S.  Raymond, Thomas E. Dickey.
        Based on pcurses by Pavel Curtis.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/tic.1m.html b/doc/html/man/tic.1m.html
index 6329ca7d..02cc3b71 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/tic.1m.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/tic.1m.html
@@ -45,19 +45,16 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        tic - the terminfo entry-description compiler
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        tic  [-01CDGIKLNTUVacfgqrstx]  [-e names] [-o dir] [-Q[n]]
        [-R subset] [-v[n]] [-w[n]] file
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The tic command translates a  terminfo  file  from  source
        format  into compiled format.  The compiled format is nec-
        essary for use with the library routines in ncurses(3x).
@@ -118,8 +115,7 @@
        o   the system terminfo database (/usr/share/terminfo).
 
 
-
-

OPTIONS

+

OPTIONS

        -0     restricts the output to a single line
 
        -1     restricts the output to a single column
@@ -320,8 +316,7 @@
             keys.
 
 
-
-

PARAMETERS

+

PARAMETERS

        file   contains one or more terminfo terminal descriptions
               in  source format [see terminfo(5)].  Each descrip-
               tion in the file describes the  capabilities  of  a
@@ -332,8 +327,7 @@
               path of a character-device.
 
 
-
-

PROCESSING

+

PROCESSING

        All but one of the capabilities recognized by tic are doc-
        umented in terminfo(5).  The exception is the use capabil-
        ity.
@@ -359,8 +353,7 @@
        printed.
 
 
-
-

COMPATIBILITY

+

COMPATIBILITY

        There  is  some evidence that historic tic implementations
        treated description fields with no whitespace in  them  as
        additional  aliases  or short names.  This tic does not do
@@ -368,8 +361,7 @@
        treated that way and check them for dangerous characters.
 
 
-
-

EXTENSIONS

+

EXTENSIONS

        Unlike the SVr4 tic command, this implementation can actu-
        ally compile termcap sources.  In fact,  entries  in  ter-
        minfo  and  termcap syntax can be mixed in a single source
@@ -397,22 +389,19 @@
        itly set to it.
 
 
-
-

FILES

+

FILES

        /usr/share/terminfo/?/*
             Compiled terminal description database.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        infocmp(1m),    captoinfo(1m),   infotocap(1m),   toe(1m),
        curses(3x), term(5).  terminfo(5).
 
-       This describes ncurses version 6.0 (patch 20151205).
+       This describes ncurses version 6.0 (patch 20160130).
 
 
-
-

AUTHOR

+

AUTHOR

        Eric S. Raymond <esr@snark.thyrsus.com> and
        Thomas E. Dickey <dickey@invisible-island.net>
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/toe.1m.html b/doc/html/man/toe.1m.html
index b3bc543f..da43ec58 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/toe.1m.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/toe.1m.html
@@ -45,18 +45,15 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        toe - table of (terminfo) entries
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        toe [-v[n]] [-ahsuUV] file...
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        With no options, toe lists all available terminal types by
        primary name with descriptions.   File  arguments  specify
        the  directories  to  be scanned; if no such arguments are
@@ -111,18 +108,16 @@
               this program, and exits.
 
 
-
-

FILES

+

FILES

        /usr/share/terminfo/?/*
             Compiled terminal description database.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        tic(1m),   infocmp(1m),   captoinfo(1m),    infotocap(1m),
        curses(3x), terminfo(5).
 
-       This describes ncurses version 6.0 (patch 20151205).
+       This describes ncurses version 6.0 (patch 20160130).
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/tput.1.html b/doc/html/man/tput.1.html
index 42c0917e..11941e4e 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/tput.1.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/tput.1.html
@@ -46,14 +46,12 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        tput,  reset  -  initialize  a  terminal or query terminfo
        database
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        tput [-Ttype] capname [parms ... ]
        tput [-Ttype] init
        tput [-Ttype] reset
@@ -62,8 +60,7 @@
        tput -V
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        The tput utility uses the terminfo database  to  make  the
        values  of terminal-dependent capabilities and information
        available to the shell (see sh(1)), to initialize or reset
@@ -172,8 +169,7 @@
        has similar behavior.
 
 
-
-

EXAMPLES

+

EXAMPLES

        tput init
             Initialize the terminal according to the type of ter-
             minal  in the environmental variable TERM.  This com-
@@ -237,8 +233,7 @@
             exclamation mark (!) on a line by itself.
 
 
-
-

FILES

+

FILES

        /usr/share/terminfo
               compiled terminal description database
 
@@ -250,8 +245,7 @@
               tion of terminfo(5)
 
 
-
-

EXIT CODES

+

EXIT CODES

        If the -S option is used, tput checks for errors from each
        line, and if any errors are found, will set the exit  code
        to  4  plus the number of lines with errors.  If no errors
@@ -288,8 +282,7 @@
        TICS section.
 
 
-
-

DIAGNOSTICS

+

DIAGNOSTICS

        tput prints the following error messages and sets the cor-
        responding exit codes.
 
@@ -306,8 +299,7 @@
        ---------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        The  longname  and -S options, and the parameter-substitu-
        tion features used in the cup example, are  not  supported
        in BSD curses or in AT&T/USL curses before SVr4.
@@ -334,11 +326,10 @@
        ing only digits is intended to be a number.
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        clear(1), stty(1), tabs(1), terminfo(5), curs_termcap(3x).
 
-       This describes ncurses version 6.0 (patch 20151205).
+       This describes ncurses version 6.0 (patch 20160130).
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/tset.1.html b/doc/html/man/tset.1.html
index 8d2b4e3e..25da9be7 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/tset.1.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/tset.1.html
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 
 
 
@@ -45,21 +45,20 @@
 
 
 
-
-

NAME

+

NAME

        tset, reset - terminal initialization
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        tset  [-IQVcqrsw] [-] [-e ch] [-i ch] [-k ch] [-m mapping]
        [terminal]
        reset [-IQVcqrsw] [-] [-e ch] [-i ch] [-k ch] [-m mapping]
        [terminal]
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

+
+

tset - initialization

        Tset  initializes  terminals.   Tset  first determines the
        type of terminal that you are using.   This  determination
        is done as follows, using the first terminal type found.
@@ -99,6 +98,8 @@
        versus  the  other  initialization.   If neither option is
        given, both are assumed.
 
+
+

reset - reinitialization

        When invoked as reset, tset sets cooked  and  echo  modes,
        turns  off cbreak and raw modes, turns on newline transla-
        tion and resets any  unset  special  characters  to  their
@@ -114,6 +115,8 @@
        the abnormal state.  Also, the  terminal  will  often  not
        echo the command.
 
+
+

OPTIONS

        The options are as follows:
 
        -c   Set control characters and modes.
@@ -158,8 +161,7 @@
        tion, i.e., control-h may be specified as "^H" or "^h".
 
 
-
-

SETTING THE ENVIRONMENT

+

SETTING THE ENVIRONMENT

        It is often desirable  to  enter  the  terminal  type  and
        information  about  the  terminal's  capabilities into the
        shell's environment.  This is done using the -s option.
@@ -176,8 +178,7 @@
            eval `tset -s options ... `
 
 
-
-

TERMINAL TYPE MAPPING

+

TERMINAL TYPE MAPPING

        When the terminal is not hardwired into the system (or the
        current system information is incorrect) the terminal type
        derived  from the /etc/ttys file or the TERM environmental
@@ -236,16 +237,14 @@
        marks ("!").
 
 
-
-

HISTORY

+

HISTORY

        The tset command appeared in BSD 3.0.  The ncurses  imple-
        mentation  was lightly adapted from the 4.4BSD sources for
        a terminfo environment by Eric S. Raymond <esr@snark.thyr-
        sus.com>.
 
 
-
-

COMPATIBILITY

+

COMPATIBILITY

        The  tset  utility has been provided for backward-compati-
        bility with BSD environments (under  most  modern  UNIXes,
        /etc/inittab  and  getty(1) can set TERM appropriately for
@@ -286,8 +285,7 @@
        of tset has been removed.
 
 
-
-

ENVIRONMENT

+

ENVIRONMENT

        The tset command uses these environment variables:
 
        SHELL
@@ -304,8 +302,7 @@
             looking for the terminal description.
 
 
-
-

FILES

+

FILES

        /etc/ttys
             system  port  name  to terminal type mapping database
             (BSD versions only).
@@ -314,12 +311,11 @@
             terminal capability database
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        csh(1),   sh(1),   stty(1),   curs_terminfo(3x),   tty(4),
        terminfo(5), ttys(5), environ(7)
 
-       This describes ncurses version 6.0 (patch 20151205).
+       This describes ncurses version 6.0 (patch 20160130).
 
 
 
@@ -329,7 +325,13 @@
-

NAME

+

NAME

        wresize - resize a curses window
 
 
-
-

SYNOPSIS

+

SYNOPSIS

        #include <curses.h>
 
        int wresize(WINDOW *win, int lines, int columns);
 
 
-
-

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

        This  is  an  extension to the curses library.  It reallo-
        cates storage for an ncurses window to adjust  its  dimen-
        sions  to  the  specified  values.  If either dimension is
@@ -68,16 +65,14 @@
        tion (as set by wbkgdset) merged into them.
 
 
-
-

RETURN VALUE

+

RETURN VALUE

        The function returns the integer ERR upon failure  and  OK
        on success.  It will fail if either of the dimensions less
        than or equal  to  zero,  or  if  an  error  occurs  while
        (re)allocating memory for the window.
 
 
-
-

NOTES

+

NOTES

        The only restriction placed on the dimensions is that they
        be greater than zero.  The dimensions are not compared  to
        curses   screen   dimensions  to  simplify  the  logic  of
@@ -85,21 +80,18 @@
        dimensions fit within the actual screen dimensions.
 
 
-
-

PORTABILITY

+

PORTABILITY

        It is not possible to resize windows with SVr4 curses.
 
        This  extension of ncurses was introduced in mid-1995.  It
        was adopted in NetBSD curses (2001) and PDCurses (2003).
 
 
-
-

SEE ALSO

+

SEE ALSO

        resizeterm(3x).
 
 
-
-

AUTHOR

+

AUTHOR

        Thomas Dickey (from an equivalent function written in 1988
        for BSD curses).
 
diff --git a/man/curs_refresh.3x b/man/curs_refresh.3x
index e1552c37..82ae069b 100644
--- a/man/curs_refresh.3x
+++ b/man/curs_refresh.3x
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 .\"***************************************************************************
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2005,2010 Free Software Foundation, Inc.              *
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2010,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.              *
 .\"                                                                          *
 .\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a  *
 .\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the            *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
 .\" authorization.                                                           *
 .\"***************************************************************************
 .\"
-.\" $Id: curs_refresh.3x,v 1.15 2010/12/04 18:38:55 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: curs_refresh.3x,v 1.16 2016/01/30 15:52:36 tom Exp $
 .TH curs_refresh 3X ""
 .na
 .hy 0
@@ -55,6 +55,7 @@
 \fBint wredrawln(WINDOW *win, int beg_line, int num_lines);\fR
 .br
 .SH DESCRIPTION
+.SS refresh/wrefresh
 The \fBrefresh\fR and \fBwrefresh\fR routines (or \fBwnoutrefresh\fR and
 \fBdoupdate\fR) must be called to get actual output to the terminal, as other
 routines merely manipulate data structures.
@@ -66,6 +67,7 @@ same, using \fBstdscr\fR as the default window.
 Unless \fBleaveok\fR has been
 enabled, the physical cursor of the terminal is left at the location of the
 cursor for that window.
+.SS wnoutrefresh/doupdate
 .PP
 The \fBwnoutrefresh\fR and \fBdoupdate\fR routines allow multiple updates with
 more efficiency than \fBwrefresh\fR alone.
@@ -98,6 +100,7 @@ order and the overlap region will be modified only when it is explicitly
 changed.
 (But see the section on \fBPORTABILITY\fR below for a warning about
 exploiting this behavior.)
+.SS wredrawln/redrawwin
 .PP
 The \fBwredrawln\fR routine indicates to \fBcurses\fR that some screen lines
 are corrupted and should be thrown away before anything is written over them.
@@ -110,7 +113,7 @@ completion.
 .PP
 X/Open does not define any error conditions.
 In this implementation
-.RS
+.RS 3
 .TP 5
 \fBwnoutrefresh\fP
 returns an error
diff --git a/man/tset.1 b/man/tset.1
index e151e753..0de04f5e 100644
--- a/man/tset.1
+++ b/man/tset.1
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 .\"***************************************************************************
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2011,2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.              *
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2013,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.              *
 .\"                                                                          *
 .\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a  *
 .\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the            *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
 .\" authorization.                                                           *
 .\"***************************************************************************
 .\"
-.\" $Id: tset.1,v 1.29 2013/12/21 22:15:53 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: tset.1,v 1.31 2016/01/30 15:41:41 tom Exp $
 .TH @TSET@ 1 ""
 .ie \n(.g .ds `` \(lq
 .el       .ds `` ``
@@ -39,6 +39,7 @@
 .br
 \fBreset\fR [\fB\-IQVcqrsw\fR] [\fB\-\fR] [\fB\-e\fR \fIch\fR] [\fB\-i\fR \fIch\fR] [\fB\-k\fR \fIch\fR] [\fB\-m\fR \fImapping\fR] [\fIterminal\fR]
 .SH DESCRIPTION
+.SS tset - initialization
 \&\fBTset\fR initializes terminals.
 \fBTset\fR first determines the type of terminal that you are using.
 This determination is done as follows, using the first terminal type found.
@@ -75,6 +76,7 @@ standard error output.
 Use the \fB\-c\fP or \fB\-w\fP option to select only the window sizing
 versus the other initialization.
 If neither option is given, both are assumed.
+.SS reset - reinitialization
 .PP
 When invoked as \fBreset\fR, \fB@TSET@\fR sets cooked and echo modes,
 turns off cbreak and raw modes, turns on newline translation and
@@ -88,6 +90,7 @@ you may have to type
 (the line-feed character is normally control-J) to get the terminal
 to work, as carriage-return may no longer work in the abnormal state.
 Also, the terminal will often not echo the command.
+.SH OPTIONS 
 .PP
 The options are as follows:
 .TP 5
diff --git a/ncurses/Makefile.in b/ncurses/Makefile.in
index ac8c2cd8..6f707dce 100644
--- a/ncurses/Makefile.in
+++ b/ncurses/Makefile.in
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-# $Id: Makefile.in,v 1.149 2016/01/23 21:32:00 tom Exp $
+# $Id: Makefile.in,v 1.150 2016/01/30 15:31:51 tom Exp $
 ##############################################################################
 # Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.                #
 #                                                                            #
@@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ tags:
 
 mostlyclean ::
 	-rm -f core tags TAGS *~ *.bak *.i *.ln *.atac
-	-test -f trace || rm -f trace
+	-test -d trace || rm -f trace
 	-rm -f $(TEST_PROGS)
 
 clean :: mostlyclean
diff --git a/package/debian-mingw/changelog b/package/debian-mingw/changelog
index b5e96925..7b38a469 100644
--- a/package/debian-mingw/changelog
+++ b/package/debian-mingw/changelog
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-ncurses6 (6.0+20160123) unstable; urgency=low
+ncurses6 (6.0+20160130) unstable; urgency=low
 
   * latest weekly patch
 
- -- Thomas E. Dickey   Sat, 23 Jan 2016 12:00:36 -0500
+ -- Thomas E. Dickey   Sat, 30 Jan 2016 10:30:48 -0500
 
 ncurses6 (5.9-20131005) unstable; urgency=low
 
diff --git a/package/debian-mingw64/changelog b/package/debian-mingw64/changelog
index b5e96925..7b38a469 100644
--- a/package/debian-mingw64/changelog
+++ b/package/debian-mingw64/changelog
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-ncurses6 (6.0+20160123) unstable; urgency=low
+ncurses6 (6.0+20160130) unstable; urgency=low
 
   * latest weekly patch
 
- -- Thomas E. Dickey   Sat, 23 Jan 2016 12:00:36 -0500
+ -- Thomas E. Dickey   Sat, 30 Jan 2016 10:30:48 -0500
 
 ncurses6 (5.9-20131005) unstable; urgency=low
 
diff --git a/package/debian/changelog b/package/debian/changelog
index b1736dc6..33704b2a 100644
--- a/package/debian/changelog
+++ b/package/debian/changelog
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-ncurses6 (6.0+20160123) unstable; urgency=low
+ncurses6 (6.0+20160130) unstable; urgency=low
 
   * latest weekly patch
 
- -- Thomas E. Dickey   Sat, 23 Jan 2016 12:00:36 -0500
+ -- Thomas E. Dickey   Sat, 30 Jan 2016 10:30:48 -0500
 
 ncurses6 (5.9-20120608) unstable; urgency=low
 
diff --git a/package/mingw-ncurses.nsi b/package/mingw-ncurses.nsi
index bdd6bf9b..659a0c01 100644
--- a/package/mingw-ncurses.nsi
+++ b/package/mingw-ncurses.nsi
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-; $Id: mingw-ncurses.nsi,v 1.142 2016/01/23 17:00:00 tom Exp $
+; $Id: mingw-ncurses.nsi,v 1.143 2016/01/30 15:30:48 tom Exp $
 
 ; TODO add examples
 ; TODO bump ABI to 6
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
 !define VERSION_MAJOR "6"
 !define VERSION_MINOR "0"
 !define VERSION_YYYY  "2016"
-!define VERSION_MMDD  "0123"
+!define VERSION_MMDD  "0130"
 !define VERSION_PATCH ${VERSION_YYYY}${VERSION_MMDD}
 
 !define MY_ABI   "5"
diff --git a/package/mingw-ncurses.spec b/package/mingw-ncurses.spec
index b66ed62b..094ff5ab 100644
--- a/package/mingw-ncurses.spec
+++ b/package/mingw-ncurses.spec
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 Summary: shared libraries for terminal handling
 Name: mingw32-ncurses6
 Version: 6.0
-Release: 20160123
+Release: 20160130
 License: X11
 Group: Development/Libraries
 Source: ncurses-%{version}-%{release}.tgz
diff --git a/package/ncurses.spec b/package/ncurses.spec
index b46053e4..8b2f09d4 100644
--- a/package/ncurses.spec
+++ b/package/ncurses.spec
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 Summary: shared libraries for terminal handling
 Name: ncurses6
 Version: 6.0
-Release: 20160123
+Release: 20160130
 License: X11
 Group: Development/Libraries
 Source: ncurses-%{version}-%{release}.tgz